
Library
Consultant
Hypnotherapist
Life Coach
Website all my own work. It has some 500,000 words and many links to check. If you
find mistakes I would be pleased to know.
|
Neurypnology
or
The rationale of nervous sleep considered in relation with animal
magnetism.
James Braid
DM:- I have copied this book for others to read because I regard
this book as THE fountain head of hypnosis. Braid not only gives us
the word we now use for our subject, but brought to it a clarity of
thought and an energy of experimentation which is unparallelled.I do
not know much about his life which is not contained in the pages of
this book, but I have compiled them into a brief
biography.
DEDICATION
TO
CHARLES ANDERSON, M.D.,F.R.C.S. ED. &c.
My Dear Sir,
INCLINATION as well as duty induces me to dedicate this work to you:
that I may publicly express the lively sense of gratitude I entertain
for the many opportunities enjoyed during my apprenticeship with
yourself and your late father, of acquiring a practical as well as
theoretical knowledge of my profession; of becoming familiar with your
comprehensive views of disease, and their happy application in
practice; for the personal kindness shewn me during my pupilage; and
for the uninterrupted friendship which has ever since existed betwixt
us.
I am aware that you are not practically acquainted with the subject
of this treatise, but your intimate knowledge of general science
renders you eminently qualified for prosecuting the subject with
success; and permit me to assure you, that its value as a curative
power, for an intractable class of diseases, renders it well worthy of
your best attention.
Believe me,
My dear Sir,
Most faithfully yours,
James Braid.
3, St. Peter's Square, MANCHESTER, June 2, 1843.
top
Contents
INTRODUCTION.
General remarks - why Hypnotism has been separated from Animal
Magnetism - How far considered useful in the cure of disease - Its
Powers on the animal functions - Certain erroneous charges refuted -
Opinions and practice of Bertrand and Abbé Faria, Mr Brooks, Dr
Prichard - Its moral influence - Should be used by professional men
only - Definition of terms.
PART I.
CHAPTER I.
Introductory remarks - Circumstances which directed to the
investigation - A real phenomenon observed - Experiments instituted to
prove the cause of it - Opinions and conclusions drawn from them -
Reasons for separating Hypnotism from Mesmerism- Hypnotism more
generally successful than Animal Magnetism - Mr Herbert Mayo's
testimony on this point - Proofs of this referred to - Different modes
by which it can be induced - Can only be expected to succeed by
complying with the whole conditions required. CHAPTER
II.
Mode of Hypnotizing - Circumstances necessary to be complied with -
Peculiar phenomena which follow; excitement first, and afterwards
depression of function - Importance of attending to this - How these
may be made to alternate with each other - Extraordinaiy influence of
a current of air during Hypnotism - Reasons for certain modifications
of original modes of operating - Hypnotism proceeds from a law of the
animal economy - Arises from the physical and psychical condition of
the patient, and not from any emanation or principle proceeding from
others - Example for proof - Exhibits no appreciable electric or
magnetic change. - Two patients may hypnotize each other by contact. -
Phenomena arise spontaneously in course of disease. - Mr Wakley's
admission on this point. - Mr H. Mayo's testimony as to the effects of
Hypnotism. - Effects of different positions of the eyes - Remarks on
articles in Medical Gazette. - Consensual adjustment of eyes.- Effects
on size of pupil. - Power of habit and imagination. - Docility of
patients, and exalted sensibility, and their effects. - Patient
hypnotized whilst operating on another. - Mode of resisting influence
CHAPTER III.
Phenomena of natural sleep, dreaming, and somnambulism contrasted -
Causes of common sleep - Of dreaming - Effects of variety and monotony
compared - Charges alleged to take place in the Structure of the brain
by exertion - Cause of Hypnotism, M'Nish's article on ''Reverie"
compared with Mr Braid's theory of Hypnotism - Mode of arousing
patients from the state of Hypnotism. CHAPTER
IV.
Phenomena of common sleep - Of Hypnotism - Power of locomotion and
accurate balancing of themselves - Tendency to dance on hearing
appropriate music - Grace displayed under its influence - Tendency to
become cataleptiformly fixed in any position if left quiet -
Probability of Hypnotism having been practised amongst the ancients,
and the cause of their superior excellence in sculpture, painting, and
dancing - Effects analogous to Nitrous Oxide in some - in what it
differs front this and intoxication from wine and spirits- Analogous
to conium - Effects of monotonous impressions on any of the senses -
Opinions of Cullen, M'Nish, Willich - (Counting and repeating
generally known) - A writer in Medical Gazette - Power of habit and
expectation - All the phenomena consecutive - Note illustrating this -
Power of Hypnotism to cure intractable diseases and disorders - Miss
Collins case and Miss E. Atkinson's - Extent to which it may be
expected to be useful. CHAPTER V.
Reasons for delivering Public Lectures on Hypnotism - Mode of
procuring refreshing sleep, with low pulse and general flaccidity of
muscle - Efficacy of this plan. CHAPTER VI.
Introductory remarks - Relation between mind and matter illustrated
to disprove materialism - Armstrong, Colton, Brown, Abercrombie,
Stewart, Plato - General conclusion, that mind or life is the cause of
organism - Power of conscience - The passions, how excited - Dr
Elliotson's opinion as to the efficacy or non-efficacy of volition and
sympathy with operator's brain - Modes of dividing the brain - Causes
of Phrenology being imperfect - Objections to Phreno-Hypnotism - Mode
of connection between the brain and body - First attempts at
Phrenologizing during Hypnotism were failures - Succeeded by operating
differently - Cases illustrative - A child operates successfully -
Details of the case - Other successful cases- Proper time for
operating - Case of an officer in 1758 - Inferences as to its curative
powers - Opinions of La Roy Sunderland, and Mr Hall - Presumed cause
of phenomena called Cross Magnetism - Return stolen property to proper
owners and proper place by smell and touch - Power of hearing faint
sounds - Additional cases - Opposite faculties can be excited at
the same time by acting on the opposite hemispheres - Mode of
operating - Concluding remarks on the value of testimony.
CHAPTER VII.
General resumé - Many phenomena admit of physical and
chemical proof - Difficulties of comprehending many phenomena -
Effects of prejudice in preventing the reception of truth - Critique
on debate at Medico-Chirurgical Society on Mr Ward's operation - State
of the circulation - Conjectures as to the cause of the cataleptiform
condition. PART II.
Modes of operating - Objects of operations - Cases of sight improved
- Hearing - Deaf and dumb - Mr Curtis's remarks - James Shelmerdine's
case - Mr Bingham's testimony - S. Taylor - Sense of smell - Touch and
resistance - Tic, paralysis of sense and motion, cured - Miss E.
Atkinson's case, voice recovered - Rheumatism, ten cases - Irregular
muscular action - Headache - Spinal Irritation - Epilepsy - Spinal
curvature - Neuralgia, and palpitation of the heart - Surgical
operations without pain - Diseases of the skin - Locked jaw - Tonic
spasm - Miss Collins - Concluding remarks.
top
Introduction
IT was my intention to have published my "Practical Essay on
the Curative Agency of Neuro- Hypnotism," exactly as delivered at
the Conversazione given, to the members of the British Association in
Manchester, on the 19th June, 1842. By so doing, and by appending foot
notes, comprising the data on which my views were grounded, it would
have conveyed a pretty clear knowledge of the subject, and of the
manner in which it had been treated. It has since been suggested,
however, that it might readily be incorporated with the short
Elementary Treatise on Neuro-Hypnology, which I originally intended to
publish, and which I am earnestly solicited to do, by letters from
professional gentlemen from all quarters. I now, therefore, submit my
views to the public in the following condensed form. I shall aim at
brevity and perspicuity; and my great object will be to teach others
all I know of the modes of inducing the phenomena, and their
application in the cure of diseases, and to invite my professional
brethren to labour in the same field of inquiry, feeling assured, that
the cause of science and humanity must thereby be promoted.
It was with this conviction I offered my "Practical Essay on
the Curative Agency of Neuro-Hypnotism," to the medical section
of the British Association.
In November, 1841, 1 was led to investigate the pretensions of
animal magnetism, or mesmerism, as a complete sceptic, from an anxiety
to discover the source of fallacy in certain phenomena I had heard
were exhibited at M. Lafoutaine's conversazioni. The result was, that
I made some discoveries which appeared to elucidate certain of the
phenomena, and rendered them interesting, both in a speculative and
practical point of view. I considered it a most favourable opportunity
for having additional light thrown upon this subject, to offer a paper
to the medical section of the British Association, which was about to
meet in Manchester. Gentlemen of scientific attainments might thus
have had an opportunity of investigating it, and eliciting the truth,
unbiassed by local or personal prejudice. I hoped to learn something
from others, on certain points which were extremely mysterious to me,
as to the cause of some remarkable phenomena. I accordingly intimated
my intention to the secretaries, by letter, on 18th May and on the
morning of Wednesday, the 22d June, 1842, sent the paper I proposed
reading for the consideration of the committee, intimating also, by
letter, my intention to produce before them as many of the patients as
possible, whose cases were referred to in proof of the curative agency
of Neuro-Hypnotism, so that they might have an opportunity of
ascertaining, for themselves, the real facts of the cases,
uninfluenced by any bias or partiality that I might exhibit as the
discoverer arid adapter of this new mode of treatment. The committee
of the medical section, however, were pleased to decline entertaining
the subject.
Many of the most eminent and influential members of the
Association, however, had already witnessed and investigated my
experiments in private, and expressed themselves highly gratified and
interested with them. In compliance with the repeated desire of these
gentlemen, and many other eminent members of the Association to whom I
could not possibly afford time to exhibit my experiments in private,
and who were anxious to have an opportunity afforded them of seeing,
hearing, and judging of the phenomena for themselves, I gave a
gratuitous conversazione, when I read the "Rejected Essay,"
and exhibited the experiments in a public room, to which all the
members of the Association had been respectfully invited. The interest
with which the subject was viewed by the members of the Association
generally, was sufficiently testified by the number and high
respectability of those who attended on that occasion; in reference to
which the chairman requested the reporters to put on record, "that
he had been in the habit for many years of attending public meetings,
and he had never in his life seen a more unmixed, a more entirely
respectable assembly in Manchester." It was also manifested by
their passing a vote of thanks at the conclusion of the conversazione,
for my having afforded an opportunity to the members of the British
Association of witnessing my experiments, to which they had previously
borne testimony as having been "highly successful."
On that occasion I stated, there were certain phenomena, which I
could readily induce by particular manipulations, whilst I candidly
confessed myself unable to explain the modus operandi by which
they were induced. I referred particularly to the extraordinary
rapidity with which dormant functions, and a state of cataleptiform
rigidity, may be changed to the extreme opposite condition, by a
simple waft of wind, either from the lips, a pair of bellows, or by
any other mechanical means. I solicited information on these points,
both privately and publicly, from all the eminently scientific
gentlemen who honoured me with their company during the meetings of
the British Association in this town; but no one ventured to express a
decided opinion as to the causes of these remarkable phenomena. I now
beg to assure every reader of this treatise, that I shall esteem it a
great favour to be enlightened on points which I confess are, at
present, still above my comprehension. It will be observed, for
reasons adduced, I have now entirely separated Hypnotism from Animal
Magnetism. I consider it to be merely a simple, speedy, and certain
mode of throwing the nervous system into a new condition, which may be
rendered eminently available in the cure of certain disorders. I
trust, therefore, it may be investigated quite independently of any
bias, either for or against the subject, as connected with mesmerism;
and only by the facts which can be adduced. I feel quite confident we
have acquired in this process a valuable addition to our curative
means; but I repudiate the idea of holding it up as a universal
remedy; nor do I even pretend to understand, as yet, the whole
range of diseases in which it may be useful. Time and experience
alone can determine this question, as is the case with all other new
remedies.
When we consider that in this process we have acquired the power of
raising sensibility to the most extraordinary degree, and also of
depressing it far below the torpor of natural sleep; (Footnote: Vide
Experiments, pp. 61 to 67. Chapter IV) and that from the latter
condition, any or all of the senses may be raised to the exalted state
of sensibility referred to, almost with the rapidity of thought,
by so simple an agency as a puff of air directed against the
respective parts; and that we can also raise and depress the force and
frequency of the circulation, locally or generally, in a most
extraordinary degree, it must be evident we have thus an important
power to act with. Whether these extraordinary physical effects are
produced through the imagination chiefly, or by other means, it
appears to me quite certain, that the imagination has never been so
much under our control, or capable of being made to act in the same
beneficial and uniform manner, by any other mode of management
hitherto known.
That we really have acquired in this process a valuable addition to
our curative means, which enables us speedily to put an end to many
diseases which resisted ordinary treatment, I think will be
satisfactorily manifested by the cases which I have recorded. Many of
these cases have been seen by other medical men, and are so
remarkable, so self-evident to every candid and intelligent mind, that
it is impossible, with any shew of propriety, to deny them. Most
unwarrantable and novel attempts have been made, not only to
extinguish the farther prosecution of Hypnotism, but also to
misrepresent all I had either said or done on the subject, and thus
damage me, as well as Hypnotism, in public estimation. I am in
possession of a mass of documentary evidence in proof of this, to an
extent which could scarcely be credited. But I shall not trouble my
readers with details of all that has been done in order to prejudice
my patients against me.
As regards general principles, it has even been attempted, by
garbled statements, to set forth such gross misrepresentations as
could only be credited by parties totally ignorant of the subject.
Thus it was alleged, that my mode of hypnotizing was no novelty; on
the contrary, that it was an unacknowledged plagiarism, and that it
was the opinion and practice of Bertrand and the Abbé Faria.
Now, so far as I have been able to comprehend the meaning of Bertrand,
which Colquhoun observes, "it is rather difficult to comprehend,"
he adheres "to the theory of imagination, and imagination alone,"
(Colquhoun's Introduction, p. 94.) At p. 34, vol. iv, of the "Encyclopaedia
of Practical Medicine," Dr Prichard says of Bertrand, that he "comes
at last to the conclusion, that all the results of these operations
are brought about through the influence of the mind;" that is,
through the influence of the imagination of the patients acting on
themselves. Bertrand also
supports this opinion by the manner in which the Abbé Faria
performed magnetization. His plan was his : "He placed the
patient in an arm-chair, and after telling him to shut his eyes, and
collect himself, suddenly pronounced, in a strong voice and imperative
tone, the word 'dormez,' which generally produced on the individual an
impression sufficiently strong to give a slight shock, and occasion
warmth, transpiration, and sometimes somnambulism." Had his
success by this method been as general as mine, would he have used the
Word "sometimes" on this occasion ? [Footnote:
Vide p.24.] It is farther added, "if the first attempt
failed, he tried the experiment a second, third, and
even a fourth time, after which he declared the individual incapable
of entering into the state of lucid sleep." whilst it is doubted
that his success was equal to what he represented it, still Bertrand
states, in reference to the Ab Fair, that it was incontestable, "that
he very often succeeded." Now, is this not sufficient proof, that
his success was by no means so general as mine? And who does not see,
on perusing my directions for hypnotizing, [Footnote: For
proof of this, see pp. 27 and 28.] that our methods are very
different?
It is farther added, "The complete identity of the phenomena
thus produced by a method which operated confessedly through the
imagination, with those which display themselves under the ordinary
treatment of the magnetizers, affords a strong reason for concluding
that the results in other instances depend upon a similar principle."
It is still farther added, that M. Bertrand denies the necessity of
strong intense volitions of the operator being necessary to produce
the result. He declared, "that in trials trade by himself,
precisely the same results followed, whether he WILLED to produce them
or not, provided that the patient was inwardly persuaded that the
whole ritual was duly observed. Can any farther remarks be required to
prove that Bertrand referred the result entirely to the effect of
imagination ? And can any one who has attended to what I have given as
my opinion, say that this either was, or is my opinion? Certainly
quite the contrary. The parties referred to, therefore, have only
proved their belief of how easy it is, by garbled statements, to
misrepresent the truth, when submitting such remarks to those ignorant
of the subject, or who are blinded by prejudice.
The following remarks by Mr H. Brookes, a celebrated lecturer on
animal magnetism, will illustrate this point rather better than the
individuals referred to. On hearing that I had changed my original
opinion about identity, he writes thus: "I am very glad
you have length found reason to change your original opinion as to the
identity of your phenomena with those of mesmerism. From the very
first I freely admitted the value and importance of your discovery,
but I could not admit that identity, and I blamed you for insisting
upon it so hastily, and using such hard words against the animal
Magnetists, because could not agree with you. I thought, and still
think, you did wrong in that, and that you certainly did yourself
injustice, for in fact you are the original discoverer of a new
agency, and not of a mere modification of an old one."
But when so much had been said of Bertrand, with the hope of making
it appear that I had either been ignorant of, or copied his views
without due acknowledgment, which is evidently erroneous, why not have
quoted him also to prove I was wrong in attributing curative effects
as resulting from these operations? Let us hear what M. Bertrand says
on this point. He "declares, that it is difficult to imagine with
what facility the practisers of the art succeed in relieving the most
severe affections of the nervous system. Attacks of epilepsy, in
particular, are rendered considerably less frequent and severe by
their method skilfully employed; which displays in so remarkable a
manner the influence of moral impressions on the physical state of the
constitution." After such declarations in favour of the curative
power of mesmerism, had M. Bertrand's method of inducing the
condition been as generally and speedily successful as mine, will any
one believe that it would not have been brought more generally into
practice ere now ? Mr Mayo, one of our best authorities, in a letter
to me on this subject states distinctly that the great reason for its
not being more generally introduced into practice, was the tediousness
of the processes for inducing the condition, and the uncertainty,
after all the time and trouble devoted to the manipulation, of
producing any result whatever. He concludes his observations on this
subject, by the remark, "It took up too much time."
And Dr Pritchard, author of the article referred to in the
Encyclopedia of Practical Medicine, adds, "On the whole, when we
consider the degree of suffering occasioned by disorders of the class
over which magnetism exerts an influence, through the medium of the
imagination, and the little efficacy which ordinary remedies possess,
of alleviating or counteracting them, it is much to be wished that
this art, notwithstanding the problematical nature of the theories
connected with it, were better known to us in actual practice."
I am aware great prejudice has been raised against mesmerism, from
the idea that it might be turned to immoral purposes. In respect to
the Neuro-Hypnotic state, induced by the method explained in this
treatise, I am quite certain that it deserves no such censure.
I have proved by experiments, both in public and in private, that
during the state of excitement, the judgment is sufficiently active to
make the patients, if possible, even more fastidious as
regards propriety of conduct, than in the waking condition; and from
the state of rigidity and insensibility, they can be roused to a state
of mobility, arid exalted sensibility, either by being rudely handled,
or even by a breath of air. Nor is it requisite this should be done by
the person who put them into the Hypnotic state. It will follow
equally from the manipulations of any one else, or a current of air
impinging against the body, from any mechanical contrivance whatever.
And, finally, the state cannot be induced, in any stage, unless with
the knowledge and consent of the party operated on. This is more than
can be said respecting a great number of our most valuable medicines,
for there are many which we are in the daily habit of using, with the
best advantage in the relief and cure of disease, which may be, and
have been rendered most potent for the furtherance of the ends of the
vicious and cruel; and which can be administered without the
knowledge of the intended victim. It ought never to be lost sight
of, that there is the use and abuse of every thing in
nature. It is the use, and only the judicious use of
Hypnotism, which I advocate.
It is well known that I have never made any secret of my modes of
operating, as they have not only been exhibited and explained
publicly, but also privately, to any professional gentleman, who
wished for farther information on the subject. Encouraged by the
confidence which flows from a consciousness of the honesty and
integrity of my purpose, and a thorough conviction of the reality and
value of this as a means of cure, I have persevered, in defiance of
much, and, as I think, unwarrantable and capricious opposition.
In now unfolding to the medical profession generally - to whose
notice, and kind consideration, this treatise is more particularly
presented - my views on what I conceive to be a very important,
powerful, and extraordinary agent in the healing art; I beg at once
distinctly to be understood, as repudiating the idea of its being, or
ever becoming, a universal remedy. On the contrary, I feel quite
assured it will require ill the acumen and experience of medical men,
to decide in what cases it would be safe and proper to have recourse
to such a mean; and I have always deprecated, in the strongest terms,
any attempts at its use amongst unprofessional persons, for the sake
of curiosity, or even for a nobler and more benevolent object - the
relief of the infirm; because I am satisfied it ought to be left in
the hands of professional men, and of them only. I have myself met
with some cases in which I considered it unsafe to apply it at all;
and with other cases in which it would have been most hazardous to
have carried the operation so far as the patients urged me to do. [Footnote:
The circumstances which render my operations dangerous, the symptoms
which indicate danger, and the mode of acting when they occur, to
remove them, are pointed out, pp. 52 and 53 - end of Chapter III.]
In now submitting my opinions and practice to the profession in the
following treatise, I consider
myself as having discharged an imperative duty to them, and to the
cause of humanity. In future, I intend to go on quietly and patiently,
prosecuting the subject in the course of my practice, and shall leave
others to adopt or reject it, as they shall find consistent with their
own convictions. As it is of the utmost importance, in discussing any
subject, to have a correct knowledge of the meaning attached to
peculiar terms made use of, I shall now give a few definitions, and
explain my reasons for adopting the terms selected.
Neurypnology is derived from the Greek words neuron, nerve;
hypnos, sleep; logos, a discourse [Greek letters
in original - DM]; and means the rationale, or doctrine
of nervous sleep, which I define to be, "a peculiar
condition of the nervous system, into which it can be thrown by
artificial contrivance:" or thus, "a peculiar condition of
the nervous system, induced by a fixed and abstracted attention of the
mental and visual eye, on one object, not of an exciting nature."
By the term "Neuro-Hypnotism," then, is to be understood "nervous
sleep ;" and, for the sake of brevity, suppressing the prefix "Neuro,"
by the terms-
HYPNOTIC = The state or condition of nervous sleep.
HYPNOTIZE = To induce nervous sleep.
HYPNOTIZED = One who has been put into the state of nervous sleep
HYPNOTISM = Nervous sleep.
DEHYPNOTIZE = To restore from the state or condition of nervous
sleep.
DEHYPNOTIZED = Restored from the state or condition of' nervous
sleep.
and
HYPNOTIST = One who practises Neuro-Hypnotism.
Whenever, therefore, any of these terms are used in the following
pages, I beg to be understood as alluding to the discovery I have made
of certain peculiar phenomena derived and elicited by my mode of
operating; and of which, to prevent misconception, and intermingling
with other theories and practices on the nervous system, I have
thought it best to give the foregoing designation.
I regret, as many of my readers may do, the inconvenient length of
the name; but, as most of our professional terms, and nearly all those
of a doctrinal meaning, have a Greek origin, I considered it most in
accordance with good taste, not to deviate from an established usage.
To obviate this in some degree, I have struck out two letters from the
original orthography, which was Neuro-Hypnology.
top
Chapter 1.
HAVING in the introduction, presented a cursory view of certain
points, and given a few explanatory remarks, I shall now proceed to a
more particular and detailed consideration of the subject. I shall
explain the course I have pursued in prosecuting my investigation; the
phenomena which I discovered to result from the manipulations had
recourse to; the inferences I was consequently led to deduce from
them; the method I now recommend for inducing the hypnotic condition,
for applying it in the cure of various disorders, and the result of my
experience, as to the efficacy of hypnotism as a curative agent.
By the impression which hypnotism induces on the nervous system, we
acquire a power of rapidly curing many functional disorders, most
intractable, or altogether incurable, by ordinary remedies, and also
many of those distressing affections which, as in most cases they
evince no pathological change of structure, have been presumed to
depend on some peculiar condition of the nervous system, and have
therefore, by universal consent, been denominated 'nervous
complaints;' and as I felt satisfied it was not dependent on any
special agency or emanation, passing from the body of the operator to
that of the patient, as the animal magnetisers allege is the case by
their process, I considered it desirable, for the sake of preventing
misconception, to adopt new terms, as explained in the introduction.
I was led to discover the mode I now adopt with so much success for
inducing this artificial condition of the nervous system, by a course
of experiments instituted with the view to determine the cause of
mesmeric phenomena. Front all I had read and heard of mesmerism, (such
as, the phenomena being capable of being excited in so few, and these
few individuals in a state of disease, or naturally of a delicate
constitution, or peculiarly susceptible temperament, and from the
phenomena, when induced, being said to be so exaggerated, or of such
an extraordinary nature) I was fully inclined to join with those who
considered the whole to be a system of collusion or delusion, or of
excited imagination, sympathy, or imitation.
The first exhibition of the kind I ever had an opportunity of
attending, was one of M. Lafontaine's conversazione, on the 13th
November, 1841. That night I saw nothing to diminish, but rather to
confirm, my previous prejudices. At the next conversazione, six nights
afterwards, one fact, the inability of a patient to open
his eyelids, arrested my attention. I considered that to be a real
phenomenon, and was anxious to discover the physiological cause of
it. Next night, I watched this case when again operated on, with
intense interest, and before the termination of the experiment, felt
assured I had discovered its cause, but considered it prudent not to
announce my opinion publicly, until I had had an opportunity of
testing its accuracy, by experiments and observation in private.
In two days afterwards, I developed my views to my friend Captain
Brown, as I had also previously done to four other friends; and in his
presence, and that of my family, and another friend, the same evening,
I instituted a series of experiments to prove the correctness of my
theory, namely, that the continued fixed stare, by paralysing nervous
centres in the eyes and their appendages, [Footnote: By this
expression I mean the state of exhaustion which follows too long
continued, or too intense action, of any organ or function.] and
destroying the equilibrium of the nervous system, thus produced the
phenomenon referred to. The experiments were varied so as to convince
all present, that they fully bore out the correctness of my
theoretical views.
My first object, was to prove, that the inability of the patient to
open his eyes was caused by paralysing the levator muscles of the
eyelids, through their continued action during the protracted fixed
stare, and thus rendering it physically impossible for him to
open them. [Footnote: Attempts have been made to prove, that I
got this idea from a person who publicly maintained that the patient
referred to could have opened his eyes if he liked; to
this the patient having replied, 'I have tried all I could and
cannot;' the individual referred to, in support of his opinion,
alleged, that the inability was only imaginary; that he 'could
easily believe that a man may stand with his back to a wall, and may
really believe that he has no power to move from the wall.' It is
therefore clear this individual attributed the phenomena to a mental,
whilst I attributed it to a physical cause.]
With the view of proving this, I requested Mr Walker, a young
gentleman present, to sit down, and maintain a fixed stare at the top
of a wine bottle, placed so much above him as to produce a
considerable strain on the eyes and eyelids, to enable him to maintain
a steady view of the object. In three minutes his eyelids closed, a
gush of tears ran down his cheeks, his head drooped, his face was
slightly convulsed, he gave a groan, and instantly fell into profound
sleep, the respiration becoming slow, deep and sibilant, the right
hand and arm being agitated by slight convulsive movements. At the end
of four minutes I considered it necessary, for his safety, to put an
end to the experiment.
This experiment not only proved what I expected, but also, by
calling my attention to the spasmodic state of the muscles of the face
and arm, the peculiar state of the respiration, and the condition of
the mind, as evinced on rousing the patient, tended to prove to my
mind I had got the key to the solution of mesmerism. The agitation and
alarm of this gentleman, on being roused, very much astonished Mrs
Braid. She expressed herself greatly surprised at his being so much
alarmed about nothing, as she had watched the whole time, and never
saw me near him, or touching him in any way whatever. I proposed that
she should be the next subject operated on, to which she readily
consented, assuring all present that she would not be so easily
alarmed as the gentleman referred to. I requested her to sit down, and
gaze on the ornament of a china sugar basin, placed at the same angle
to the eyes as the bottle in the former experiment. In two minutes the
expression of the face was very much changed; at the end of two
minutes and a half the eyelids closed convulsively; the mouth was
distorted; she give a deep sigh, the bosom heaved, she fell back, and
was evidently passing into an hysteric paroxysm, to prevent which I
instantly aroused her, on counting the pulse I found it had mounted up
to 180 strokes a minute.
In order to prove my position still more clearly, I called up one of
my men-servants, who knew nothing of mesmerism, and gave him such
directions as were calculated to impress his mind with the idea, that
his fixed attention was merely for the purpose of watching a chemical
experiment in the preparation of some medicine, and being familiar
with such he could feel no alarm. In two minutes and a half his
eyelids closed stoutly with a vibrating motion, his chin fell on his
breast, he gave a deep sigh, and instantly was in a profound sleep,
breathing loudly. All the persons present burst into a fit of
laughter, but still he was not interrupted by us. In about one minute
after his profound sleep I roused him, and pretended to chide him for
being so careless, said he ought to be ashamed of himself for not
being able to attend to my instructions for three minutes without
falling asleep, and ordered him down stairs. In a short time I
recalled this young man, and desired hint to sit down once more, but
to be careful not to go to sleep again, as on the former occasion. He
sat down with this intention, but in the expiration of two minutes and
a half his eyelids closed, and exactly the same phenomena as in the
former experiment ensued.
I again tried the experiment by causing Mr Walker to gaze on a
different object from that used in the first experiments, but still,
as I anticipated, the phenomena were the same. I also tried him à
la Fontaine, with the thumbs and eyes, and likewise by gazing on
my eyes without contact, and still he effects were the same, as I
fully expected.
I now stated that I considered the experiments fully proved my
theory; and expressed my entire conviction that the phenomena of
mesmerism were to be accounted for on the principle of a derangement
of the state of the cerebrospinal centres, and of the circulatory, and
respiratory, and muscular systems, induced, as I have explained, by a
fixed stare, absolute repose of body, fixed attention, and suppressed
respiration, concomitant with that fixity of attention. That the whole
depended on the physical and psychical condition of the patient,
arising from the causes referred to, and not it all on the volition,
or passes of the operator, throwing out a magnetic fluid, or exciting
into activity some mystical universal fluid medium. I farther added,
that having thus produced the primary phenomena, I had no
doubt but the others would follow as a matter of course, time being
allowed for their gradual and successive development. [Footnote:
It has been asserted, for the mere purpose of proving the
contrary, that I had claimed being the first to discover that contact
was not necessary, and that a magnetic fluid , was not
required to produce the phenomena of mesmerism. I never made any such
claim, but illustrated these facts by the most simple and conclusive
experiments probably which were ever adduced for that purpose. In one
of my lectures, I gave a history of mesmerism, including Mesmer's
attempt to mesmerise trees in Dr Franklin's garden, to prove to the
Commission of l784, that the patients would become affected when they
went under the mesmerised trees, from the magnetic fluid passing from
the trees to the patients. This was proof sufficient, that even Mesmer
did not hold that contact was necessary. I farther stated the
fact, that the experiment was a failure, as the patient became
affected, not under the mesmerised, but under the unmesmerised
trees, which led the Commission to infer, that the phenomena resulted
from imagination, and not from the influence of a magnetic fluid.
Here, then, we had two theories, neither of which considered contact
necessary. Surely no one could suppose that I wished to lay claim to
these facts as discoveries of my own, seeing I gave the dates when the
occurrence took place, which was many years before I was born.]
Moreover, I explained, at the same lecture, the different modes of
mesmerising, by passes at a distance, and by pointing the
fingers at the eyes and forehead, adopted by others, long before I
made any experiments on the subject; and at subsequent lectures, from
observing the graceful attitudes some patients assumed during the
hypnotic state, and the ease with which they could maintain any given
position, by becoming cataleptiformly fixed in it, I hazarded the
opinion, that it may have been to hypnotism the Grecians, were
indebted for their fine statuary; and the Fakirs for their power of
performing their remarkable feats. I also expressed my belief, that
the rapt state of religious enthusiasts, such as that of the monks of
Mount Athos, arose from the same cause, although none of the parties
might have understood the true principle by which they were produced.
For a considerable time I was of opinion that the phenomena induced
by my mode of operating and that of the mesmerisers, were identical;
and, so far as I have yet personally seen, I still consider the
condition of the nervous system induced by both modes to be at least
analogous. It appeared to me that the fixation of the mind and eyes
Was attained occasionally during the monotonous movements of the
mesmerises, and thus they succeeded sometimes, and as it were, by
chance; Whereas, by my insisting on the eyes being fixed in the most
favourable position, and the mind thus riveted to one idea, as the
primary and imperative conditions, my success was consequently
general and the effects intense, while theirs was feeble and
uncertain. However, from what the mesmerisers state as to effects
which they can produce in certain cases, there seem to be differences
sufficient to warrant the conclusion that they ought to be considered
as distinct agencies; and for the following reasons. The mesmerisers
positively assert that they can produce certain effects, which I have
never been able to produce by my mode, although I have tried to do so.
[Footnote: The effects I allude to are such as, telling the time
on a watch held behind the head, or placed on the pit of the stomach;
reading closed letters, or a shut book; perceiving what is doing miles
off; having the power of perceiving the nature and cure of the
diseases of others, although uneducated in medical science;
mesmerising patients at miles' distance, without the knowledge or
belief in the patient that any such operation is intended.]
Now, I do not consider it fair or proper to impugn the statements of
others in this matter, who are known to be men of talent and
observation, and of undoubted credit in other matters, merely
because I have not personally witnessed the phenomena,
or been able to produce them myself, either by my own mode or theirs.
With my present means of knowledge I am willing to admit that certain
phenomena to which I refer have been induced by others, but
still I think most of them may be explained in a different and more
natural way than that of the mesmerisers. When I shall have personally
had evidence of the special influence and its effects to which they
lay claim, I shall not be backward in bearing testimony to the fact.
However, the greatest and most important difference is this, that
they can succeed so seldom, anti I so generally, in inducing the
phenomena which we both profess thus to effect. Granting, therefore,
to the mesmerisers the full credit of being able to produce certain
wonderful phenomena which I have not been able to produce by my plan,
still it follows, that mine is superior to theirs in as far as general
applicability and practical utility are concerned. Mine
has also this advantage, that I am quite certain no one can be
affected by it, in any stage of the process, unless by the free will
and consent of the patient, which is at once sufficient to exonerate
the practice from the imputations of being capable of being converted
to immoral purposes, which has been so much insisted on to the
prejudice of animal magnetism. This has arisen from the mesmerisers
asserting that they have the power of overmastering patients
irresistibly, even whilst at a distance, by mere volition and secret
passes.
I am fully borne out by the opinion of that eminent physiologist, Mr
Herbert Mayo, in my view of the subject, that my plan is 'the best,
the shortest, and surest for getting the sleep,' and throwing the
nervous system, by artificial contrivance, into a new condition, which
may be rendered available in the healing art. At a private
conversazione, which I gave to the profession in London on the 1st
of March, 1842, he examined and tested my patients most carefully,
submitted himself to be operated on by me both publicly and privately,
and was so searching and inquisitive in his investigations as to call
forth the animadversions of a medical gentleman present, who thought
he was not giving me fair play; but which he has assured me proceeded
from an anxious desire to know the truth, not being biased by having
any peculiar views of his own to bring forward; and because he
considered the subject most important, both in a speculative and
practical point of view.
Whatever I advance, therefore, in the following remarks, I wish to
be distinctly understood as strictly in reference to my own mode of
operating, and distinct from that of all others. The latter I shall
merely refer to in as far as is necessary to point out certain sources
of fallacy by which the phenomena of the one may be confounded with
those of the other.
In proof of the general success of my mode of operating, I need only
name, that at one of my public lectures in Manchester, fourteen male
adults, in good health, all strangers to me, stood up at once, and ten
of them became decidedly hypnotised. At Rochdale I conducted the
experiments for a friend, and hypnotised twenty strangers in one
night. At a private conversazione to the profession in London, on the
1st of March, 1842, eighteen adults, most of them entire
strangers to me, sat down at once, and in ten minutes sixteen of them
were decidedly hypnotised. Mr Herbert Mayo tested some of these
patients, and satisfied himself of the reality of the phenomena.
On another occasion I took thirty-two children into a room, none of
whom had either seen or heard of hypnotism or mesmerism : I made them
stand up at three times, and in ten or twelve minutes had the whole
thirty-two hypnotised, maintaining their arms extended while in the
hypnotic condition, and this at mid-day. In making this statement, I
do not mean to say they were in the ulterior stage, or state
of torpor; but that they were in the primary stage, or
that of excitement, front which experience has taught me
confidently to rely that the torpid and rigid state will certainly
follow, by merely affording time for the phenomena to develop
themselves. In the Stockport Chronicle of 4th February,
1842, there is a report of a lecture delivered in that town a few days
before. A dozen male patients were made to stand up at once, and
treated according to my method, six of them became hypnotised, and two
of them so deeply, as to cause the lecturer very considerable trouble
to rouse them. With one named 'Charlie', all the usual means,
including buffeting and frictions before a fire, did not succeed in
restoring speech until he had been made to swallow nearly half a
tumbler glass of neat gin. I consider this important
as being the testimony of an enemy. It can take place also in
the dark, as well as by day or by gas light; when the eyes are
bandaged, as when they are uncovered, by merely keeping the eyes
fixed, the body in a state of absolute rest, and the mind abstracted
from all other considerations. In cases of children, and those of weak
intellect, or of restless and excitable minds, whom I could not manage
so as to make them comply with these simple rules, I have always been
foiled, although most anxious to succeed. This I consider a strong
proof of the correctness of my views. By arresting the attention, and
fixing the eyes, it is also successful with brute animals.
This general success of my plan, both with man and brute animals, I
consider sufficient to prove it proceeds from a law in the animal
economy. The exceptions to success are so few as to lead to the
conclusion that they arise from a non-compliance with the conditions.
It is, however, unquestionable, that there exists great difference in
the susceptibility of different individuals, some becoming rapidly and
intensely affected, others slowly and feebly so.
I am aware that some say they have tried my mode, and failed to
produce the phenomena. The reason, I presume, is simply this. They
will not believe the necessity of complying with the WHOLE of the
conditions I have distinctly insisted on. But, in all fairness, if
they do not comply with the WHOLE conditions, they have no right to
expect the promised results, nor to be disappointed because they fail.
If the patient and operator comply in all respects as I
direct, success is almost certain; but, on the contrary, he is almost
equally certain to fail if all the conditions are not strictly
complied with.
When we consider the great difficulty to some persons of abstracting
their minds, and the greater difficulty of ensuring that patients
operated on in a public room shall be able to abstract their minds
entirely from the circumstances with which they are surrounded, and
from other considerations concentrate their ideas entirely on the
subject in hand, and the equally great difficulty of securing absolute
quiet where a large number of people are assembled, and the extreme
quickness of hearing when patients are passing into the hypnotic
state, which makes them liable to be roused by the slightest noise, it
must be evident, that a public lecture-room is by no means a
favourable place for operating on patients for the first time.
Prosecuting the investigation, as I have been doing, by experiments
and observations, I have, as might be expected, had occasion to modify
and alter some of my views and manipulations; but still the principle
remains the same.
top
Chapter 2.
I now proceed to detail the mode which I practise for inducing the
phenomena. Take any bright object (I generally use my lancet case)
between the thumb and fore and middle fingers of the left hand; hold
it from about eight to fifteen inches from the eyes, at such position
above the forehead is may be necessary to produce the greatest
possible strain upon the eyes and eyelids, and enable the patient to
maintain a steady fixed stare at the object. [Footnote: At an
early period of my investigations, I caused the patients to look at a
cork bound on the forehead. This was a very efficient plan with those
who had the power of converging the eyes so as to keep them both
steadily directed on the object. I very soon found, however, that
there were many who could not keep both eyes steadily fixed on
so near an object, and that the result was, that such patients did not
become hypnotised. To obviate this, I caused them to look at a more
distant point, which, although scarcely so rapid and intense in its
effects, succeeds more generally than the other, and is therefore what
I now adopt and recommend.] The patient must be made to understand
that he is to keep the eyes steadily fixed on the object, and the mind
riveted on the idea of that one object. It will be observed, that
owing to the consensual adjustment of the eyes, the pupils will be at
first contracted : they will shortly begin to dilate, and after they
have done so to a considerable extent, and have assumed a wavy motion,
if the fore and middle fingers of the right hand, extended and a
little separated, are carried from the object towards the eyes, most
probably the eyelids will close involuntarily, with a vibratory
motion. If this is not the case, or the patient allows the eyeballs
to move, desire him to begin anew, giving him to understand that
he is to allow the eyelids to close when the fingers are again carried
towards the eyes, but that the eyeballs must be kept fixed , in
the same position, and the mind riveted to the one idea of the object
held above the eyes.
It will generally be found, that the eyelids close with a vibratory
motion, or become spasmodically closed. After ten or fifteen seconds
have elapsed, by gently elevating the arms and legs, it will be found
that the patient has a disposition to retain them in the situation in
which they have been placed, if he is intensely affected.
If this is not the case, in a soft tone of voice desire him to
retain the limbs in the extended position, and thus the pulse will
speedily become greatly accelerated, and the limbs, in process of
time, will become quite rigid and involuntarily fixed. It will also be
found, that all the organs of special sense, excepting sight,
including heat and cold, and muscular motion, or resistance, and
certain mental faculties, are at first prodigiously exalted,
such as happens with regard to the primary effects of opium, wine, and
spirits. After a certain point, however, this exaltation of function
is followed by a state of depression, far greater than the torpor of
natural sleep. [Footnote: I wish to direct especial
attention to this circumstance, as from overlooking the fact of the
first stage of this artificial hypnotism being one of excitement, with
the possession of consciousness and docility, many imagine they are
not affected, whilst the acceleration of pulse, peculiar expression of
countenance, and other characteristic symptoms, prove the existence of
the condition beyond the possibility of a doubt, to all who understand
the subject. I consider it very imprudent to carry it to the ulterior
stage, or that of torpor, at a first trial. Moreover, there is great
difference in the susceptibiIity to the neuro- hypnotic impression,
some arriving at the state of rigidity and insensibility in a few
minutes, whilst others may readily pass into the primary stage, but
can scarcely be brought into the ulterior, or rigid and torpid state.
It is also most important to note, that many instances of remarkable
and permanent cures have occurred, where it has never been carried
beyond the state of consciousness.]
From the state of the most profound torpor of the organs of special
sense, and tonic rigidity of the muscles, their may, at this stage,
instantly be restored to the opposite condition of extreme mobility
and exalted sensibility, by directing a current of air against the
organ or organs we wish to excite to action, or the muscles we wish to
render limber, and which had been in the cataleptiform state. By mere
repose the senses will speedily merge into the original condition
again. The modus operandi of the current of air producing such
extraordinary effects, I acknowledge myself quite unable to explain,
but I have no difficulty in producing and reproducing the effects by
the same means, whether performed by myself or others, and whether the
current of air is from the lips, from a pair of bellows, or by the
motion of the hand, or any inanimate object. The extent and abruptness
of these transitions (see page 63) are so extraordinary, that they
must be seen before the possibility is believed.
An abrupt blow, or pressure over the rigid muscle, will de-hypnotise
a rigid part; but, I have found pressing the nose will not restore
smell, unless very gentle and continued, nor will pressing a
handkerchief against the ear restore hearing when the ear has become
torpid, nor will gentle friction over the skin restore
sensibility to the dormant skin, or mobility to the rigid muscles
underneath, (unless so gentle as to be titillation, properly so
called) and yet a slight puff of wind will instantly rouse the
whole to abnormal sensibility and mobility : a fact which has
perplexed and puzzled me exceedingly.
At first I required the patients to look at an object until the
eyelids closed of themselves, involuntarily. I found, however, that in
many eases this was followed by pain in the globes of the eyes, and
slight inflammation of the conjunctival membrane. In order to avoid
this, I now close the eyelids, when the impression on the pupil
already referred to has taken place, because I find that the beneficial
phenomena follow this method, provided the eyeballs are kept fixed,
and thus, too, the unpleasant feelings in the globes of the eyes will
be prevented. Were the object to produce astonishment in the person
operated on, by finding himself unable to open his eyes, the former
method is the better; as the eyes once closed it is generally
impossible for him to open them; whereas they may be opened for a
considerable time after being closed in the other mode I now
recommend. However, for curative purposes, I prefer the plan which
leaves no pain in the globes of the eyes.
In fine, from a careful analysis of the whole of my experiments,
which have been very numerous, I have been led to the following
conclusion :- That it is a law in the animal economy, that by a
continued fixation of the mental and visual eye, on any object which
is not of itself of an exciting nature, with absolute repose of body,
and general quietude, they become wearied; and, provided the patients
rather favour than resist the feeling of stupor of which they will
soon experience the tendency to creep upon them, during such
experiments, a state of somnolency is induced, accompanied with that
condition of the brain and nervous system generally, which renders the
patient liable to be affected, according to the mode of manipulating,
so as to exhibit the hypnotic phenomena. As the experiment succeeds
with the blind, I consider it not so much the optic, as the sentient,
motor, and sympathetic nerves, and the mind through which the
impression is made. I feel so thoroughly convinced that it is a law of
the animal economy that such effects should follow such condition of
mind and body, that I hesitated not to give it as my deliberate
opinion, that this is a fact which cannot be controverted. As
to the modus operandi we may never be able to account for that
in a manner so is to satisfy all objections; but neither can we tell
why the law of gravitation should act as experience has taught us it
does act. Still, as our ignorance of the cause of gravitation
acting as it is known to do, does not prevent us profiting by an
accumulation of the facts known as to its results, so ought not our
ignorance of the whole laws of the hypnotic state to prevent
our studying it practically, and applying it beneficially, when we
have the power of doing so.
I feel confident that the phenomena are induced solely by an
impression made on the nervous centres, by the physical and psychical
condition of the patient, irrespective of any agency proceeding from,
or excited into action by another - as any one can hypnotise himself
by attending strictly to the simple rules I lay down; and the
following is a striking example of the fact, which was communicated to
me and two other gentlemen, by a most respectable teacher. He found
that a number of his pupils had been in the habit of hypnotising
themselves, and he had ordered them to discontinue the practice.
However, one day he ascertained a girl had hypnotised herself by
looking at the wall, and that her companions bad put a pen in her
hand, with which she bad written the word 'Manchester'; and she held
the pen very firmly - in fact the fingers were cataleptiformly rigid.
He spoke to her in a gentle tone of voice, and called her. She arose
and advanced towards him, and when awoke, was not aware he had called
her, or of what had passed. I have also had the state of the patient
tested before, during, and after being hypnotised, to ascertain if
there was any alteration in the magnetic or electric condition, but
although tested by excellent instruments, and with great care, no
appreciable difference could be detected. Patients have been
hypnotised whilst positively, and also whilst negatively, electrified,
without any appreciable difference in the phenomena; so that they
appear to be excited independently of electric or magnetic change. I
have also repeatedly made two patients hypnotise each other, at the
same time, by personal contact. How could this be reconciled with the
theory of a special influence transmitted being the cause of the
phenomena, plus and minus being equally efficient?
It is also well known, that occasionally the phenomena arise
spontaneously in the course of disease.
It is now admitted even by the editor of the Lancet, one of the
greatest opponents of mesmerism, in the leading article of 4th
February, 1843, that the phenomena 'are wonderful only to those who
are unacquainted with the aspects of disease'; and 'that we
continually see patients labouring under hysteria, and analogous forms
of nervous disease, falling suddenly into various states of stupor,
trance, and convulsion, without any assignable cause'. When it
is acknowledged that such effects as those named, may spring from such
slight influences as to be said to arise 'without any assignable
cause', can it be wondered at that important changes may be
induced by acting on the nervous system in the way I have adopted, of
which Mr Herbert Mayo, (whose competence to give an opinion on any
physiological subject no one will question, and who himself publicly
submitted to be operated on by me) observed, in the course of our
correspondence, that it induces 'a feeling of stupor, which anyone may
observe has a disposition to creep upon him, when he tries your
experiment of looking fixedly at an object as you direct'.
I thought it desirable, therefore, to adopt the name I did, for the
reasons explained in the introduction.
A patient may be hypnotised by keeping the eyes fixed in any
direction. It occurs most slowly and feebly when
the eyes are directed straight forward, and most rapidly and
intensely when they can be maintained in the position of a
double internal and upward squint.[Footnote: It is not a
little amusing to find any one try to distort so greatly, by garbled
statements, the plain meaning of an author, as to make it appear that
a writer of some articles on Animal Magnetism, in the Medical Gazette
in 1833, was well acquainted with my mode of operating. He observes at
page 856, 'On the majority of persons no influence whatever is
exhibited'. How does this coincide with the general success of my mode
as stated at page 24? 'On those least affected a number of anomalous
slight symptoms are produced'. He then describes those 'feelings of
heat and cold, and those of creeping and trembling', which, he adds,
'are only the usual imaginary feelings which most persons have if
their attention be strongly directed to any particular part of the
body, more especially if (as is generally the case with magnetic
patients) something is expected to occur'. Such are the symptoms
attributed by this writer to 'attention', but are these the symptoms
or phenomena induced by Hypnotism, as stated in Chapter IV? Or is
there the slightest similarity in the cause? In this author's view it
is the result of 'attention strongly directed to different parts of
the body', whereas mine is by attention riveted to something without
the body. The best mode of gathering the opinion of an author appears
to me to be that of his summing up at the conclusion of his subject.
Now, at page 1037, the subject is concluded by die following
observations : 'This, then, is our case. Every credible effect of
magnetism has occurred, and every incredible is said to have
occurred in eases where no magnetic influence has been exerted, but in
all which excited imagination, irritation, or some powerful mental
impression, has operated : where the mind has been alone acted on,
magnetic effects have been produced without magnetic manipulations :
where magnetic manipulations have been employed, unknown, and
therefore without the assistance of the mind, no result has ever been
produced'. Now, can any thing more be required than this, to prove
that this writer, as well as Bertrand, adheres to the theory of
imagination ? Such was the impression left on my mind by reading these
papers when they were published; and, together with Wakley's
experiments, determined me to consider the whole as a system of
collusion or illusion, or of excited imagination, sympathy, or
imitation. I therefore abandoned the subject as unworthy of further
investigation, until I attended the conversazioni of Lafontaine, where
I saw one fact, the inability of a patient to open his eyelids, which
arrested my attention; I felt convinced it was not to be attributed to
any of the causes referred to, and I therefore instituted experiments
to determine the question; and exhibited the results to the public in
a few days after.
It is now pretty generally known, that during the effort to look at
a very near object, there is produced, according to the direction of
the object, a double internal squint, or double internal and downward
or upward squint, and the pupils are thereby powerfully contracted. I
am not aware, however, that it has been recorded, that by directing
the eyes loosely, upwards or downwards, to the right or to the left,
as if looking at a very distant object, the pupils become very much
dilated, irrespective of the quantity of light passing to the
retina; so that in this manner we can contract or dilate the pupil at
will. To those who consider the movement of the iris as the mere
effect of irritability, I may observe, in that view, the former
position increases, the latter diminishes, the irritability. I may
farther remark, if the eyes are much strained in ANY
direction, I think the pupils will be found to contract as a
consequence.
It is important to remark, that the oftener patients are hypnotised,
from association of ideas and habit, the more susceptible they become;
and in this way they are liable to be affected entirely through
the imagination. Thus, if they consider or imagine there is
something doing, although they do not see it, from which they are to
be affected, they will become affected; but, on the contrary,
the most expert hypnotist in the world may exert all his endeavours in
vain, if the party does not expect it, and mentally and bodily comply,
and thus yield to it.
It is this very circumstance, coupled with the extreme docility and
mobility of the patients, and extended range and extreme quickness of
action, at a certain stage, of the ordinary functions of the organs of
sense, including heat and cold, and muscular motion, the tendency of
the patients in this state to approach to, or recede from,
impressions, according as their intensity or quality is agreeable or
the contrary, which I consider has misled so many, and induced the
animal magnetisers to imagine they could produce their effects on
patients at a distance, through mere volition and secret passes. [FOOTNOTE:
In the Medical Times of 26th March, 1842, I published
a letter on this subject, from which I make the following extracts :
'The supposed power of seeing with other parts of the body than the
eyes, I consider is a misnomer, so far as I have yet personally
witnessed. It is quite certain, however, that some patients can tell
the shape of what is held at an inch and a half from the skin, on the
back of the neck, crown of the head, arm, or hand, or other parts of
the body, but it is from feeling they do so; the extremely
exalted sensibility of the skin enabling them to discern the shape of
the object so presented, from its tendency to emit or absorb caloric.
This, however, is not sight, but feeling.
'In like manner I have satisfied myself and others, that patients
are drawn, or induced to obey the motions of the operator, not from
any peculiar inherent magnetic power in him, but from their exalted
state of feeling enabling them to discern the currents of air, which
they advance to, or retire from, according to their direction. This I
clearly proved to be the case today, and that a patient could feel and
obey, the motion of a glass funnel passed through the air at a
distance of fifteen feet.
'To remove all sources of fallacy as to the extent of influence
exercised by the patient herself, independently of any, personal or
mental influence on my part, whilst I was otherwise engaged, my
daughter requested the patient to go into a room by herself, and, when
alone, try neither she could hypnotise herself. In a short time, I was
told the patient was found fast asleep in my drawing-room. I went to
her, bandaged her eyes, and then, with the glass funnel, (which I used
to avoid the chance of electric or magnetic influence being passed
from my person to that of the patient) elevated, or drew up her arms,
and then her whole body. I now retired fifteen feet from her, and
found every time I drew the funnel towards me, she approached
nearer, but when it was forced sharply from me, she invariably
retired; and if it was moved laterally, she moved to the right or left
accordingly."]
I now continued drawing the funnel so as to keep up the currents
towards the door, and in this way, her arms being extended, and eyes
bandaged, she followed me downstairs and up again, a flight of
twenty-two steps, with the peculiar characteristic caution of the
somnambulist. After arriving at the top of the stair, I allowed her to
stand a little, and again began the drawing motion. She evidently felt
the motion, and attempted to come, but could not. I now endeavoured to
lead her by the hand, but found that the legs had become
cataleptiform, so that she could not move. I now carried her into
the drawing-room, and, after she was seated on a chair, awoke her. She
was quite unconscious of what had happened, and could not be made to
believe she had been down stairs - she said she was quite sure she
could have done no such thing without falling - and to this moment
believes we were only hoaxing her by saying she had had such a ramble.
'I had repeatedly performed this experiment with this patient and
others before, with the same result in all respects but walking up and
down stairs; and proved their readiness to be drawn by others equally
as myself when in that state; so that I consider it quite evident to
any unprejudiced person, that a patient can hypnotise himself
independently of any personal influence of another; and that it is by
extreme sensibility of the skin, and docility of the patients, that
they are drawn after an operator, rather than by magnetic attraction;
and that the power of discriminating objects held near the skin in
different parts of the body, is the result of feeling, and
not of sight.
'The moment I witnessed the attempts of a celebrated professor,to
draw a patient, I formed my opinion of the cause; - that it arose
from currents of air produced by his hand, together with the extreme
sensibility of the skin, and docility of the patients when in that
state; and my experiments have clearly proved this, some patients
acknowledging the fact.
'It may be interesting to remark, that whilst passing up and down
stairs the door bell rang, which produced such a tremor through the
whole frame as nearly caused the patient's fall- a fact quite in
accordance with the effect of any abrupt noise on NATURAL
somnambulists'.
It is owing to this extreme sensibility of the skin during
hypnotism, that patients may walk through a room blindfolded, without
running against the furniture - the difference of temperature, or
rather degree of conducting power of objects, and the resistance of
the air directing them.
I have frequently illustrated this with very sensitive patients in
the most beautiful and satisfactory manner, thus : By throwing any
fragrant and agreeable scent on a bare table the patients will
approach, anxious to smell it, but are repelled before they come quite
close to the cold table. Place a handkerchief on the table, on which
place the scent, and now the patient will approach close to it, and
revel in its fragrance. Remove the handkerchief, and the attractive
and repulsive movements will again ensue.
This was beautifully illustrated at a private conversazione at my
house lately, in the presence of several medical and other eminently
scientific gentlemen. Two patients were hypnotised, when one became so
enamoured of the scent of a gentleman's snuff-BookNeurypnology.html as to follow him
round the room. He then laid the BookNeurypnology.html about eighteen inches from the
edge of an uncovered table, when she advanced, her arms being
extended, anxious to reach the BookNeurypnology.html, but when about ten or twelve
inches from it, she started back, from perceiving the impression of
the cold table at that distance. She now made another attempt to
approach the BookNeurypnology.html, being attracted by the fragrance of its contents,
but was as speedily repelled by the cold table before she approached
it, and now kept bobbing over the BookNeurypnology.html, much in the same manner as I
have witnessed in the attempts of a hungry dog to partake of very hot
food. The other patient, in passing round the table, also caught the
smell of the BookNeurypnology.html, and advanced from another point, and thus both kept
bobbing over it, much to the amusement of all present. I now covered
the table with a handkerchief, and placed the BookNeurypnology.html on it, when they
instantly approached close to it, and seemed to feast on its
fragrance; on removing the handkerchief they withdrew, and commenced
bobbing over it as at first. The former patient had never seen such
experiments, or been tested in this way before.
It would be difficult to adduce a more striking example than the
following of the fact, that the phenomena are produced by the fixation
of the mind and eyes, and general repose of the patient, and not from
imagination, or the look or will of another. After my lecture at the
Hanover Square Rooms, London, on the 1st of March, 1842, a
gentleman told Mr Walker, who was along with me, that he was most
anxious to see me, that I might try whether I could hypnotise
him. He said both himself and friends were anxious he should be
affected, but that neither Lafontaine nor others who had tried him,
could succeed. Mr Walker said, if that is what you want, as Mr Braid
is engaged otherwise, sit down, and I will hypnotise you
myself in a minute. When I went into the room I observed what was
going on, the gentleman sitting staring at Mr Walker's finger, who was
standing a little to the right of the patient, with his eyes fixed
steadily on those of the latter. I passed on, and attended to
something else, and when I returned a little after, found Mr Walker
standing in the same position fast asleep, his arm and finger in a
state of cataleptiform rigidity, and the patient wide awake, and
staring at the finger all the while. After I had roused Mr Walker, the
gentleman observed, 'this is really very strange, that no one can
mesmerise me; I must have extraordinary powers of resistance'.
I requested him to stay a little, and I would try what I could do for
him when all was quiet. In three minutes I had him asleep, and in a
little more quite rigid. The following reasons may be assigned for my
success after Mr Walker had so signally failed. He tried it whilst
there were several people in the room, who were moving about and
talking; I took care not to commence till all was quiet - Mr Walker
had not taken the precaution to make the patient direct his eyes in
the best possible manner, but I was careful that he should do so.
Moreover, although Mr Walker had not succeeded in putting him into the
somnolent condition, he had, no doubt partially affected him, and the
influence had not entirely passed off when I began my operation. Two
days after, Mr Walker accompanied me when I called on one of the most
celebrated mesmerisers in Europe, Who, during our conversation,
stated, that a glance of the eye was quite enough, in many cases, to
produce the effects. During our conversation, I presume, he had
determined to surprise both Mr Walker and myself, by keeping his large
intellectual eyes fixed on Mr Walker. The latter, however, suspecting
what was intended, and knowing my opinion as to the mode, of resisting
the influence of such fascination, kept his eyes moving, and
his mind roaming, and thus frustrated the volition of one of the most
energetic minds, and the glances and fascination of one of the finest
pair of eyes imaginable for such a purpose. I must remark, that Mr
Walker was once magnetised by M. Lafontaine, after having been several
times operated on by me, a circumstance which of course would render
him more susceptible to the influence of the animal magnetisers' modes
of operating, according to their own theory. Had Mr Walker believed
in the power, I know he would have become affected, even supposing the
gentleman referred to had no such intention - and I am not prepared to
say he had. Mr Walker, however, firmly believed he was trying to
mesmerise him by the fascination referred to; but, relying on my
opinion, and acting accordingly, he escaped. In order to show the
efficacy of my simple plan, in a short time after, in the presence of
the same gentleman, I requested Mr Walker to hypnotise himself. By
simply fixing his eyes and mind this was accomplished in about a
minute.
top
Chapter 3.
I CONSIDER it unnecessary, in this treatise, to enter into a detailed
account of the ordinary phenomena of sleep, dreaming, and
somnambulism, as contrasted , with the waking state. Suffice it to
say, the waking condition is that of mental and bodily activity,
during which we are enabled to hold communion with the external world,
by perceiving the ordinary impressions of appropriate stimuli through
the organs of special sense, and of exercising the power of voluntary
motion, and the mental functions generally. The state of profound
sleep is exactly the reverse of this - a state of absolute
unconsciousness of all that is going on around, and suspension
of voluntary motion, and intellectual activity. In as far as regards
the organs of special sense, and voluntary motion, and a temporary
suspension of the mental energies, it is the emblem of death.
Between these extreme points there are gradual transitions,
so that there are all possible varieties of condition imaginable, from
the highest state of mental and bodily activity, to absolute torpor of
both. There are two conditions, however, to which I may briefly
advert - that of dreaming and of somnambulism. In the former,
there are some of the mental and bodily functions in a state of
partial activity, but, from the sensations arising from external
stimuli being perceived very imperfectly, erroneous impressions are
conveyed to the mind ; and, as happens in some cases of insanity, the
power of controlling the current of thought being absent, one idea
excites another, until the most incongruous combinations are produced
in many instances. Somnambulism, properly so called, is a state still
more nearly allied to the waking condition than dreaming. The mental
functions are more awake, a more just estimate of external impressions
can be formed, and there is the power of voluntary motion present in a
remarkable degree. Persons in this state are thus capable of being
directed by those around, into certain trains of thought and action.
The principal difference between the natural somnambulists, and those
who become so through hypnotising in the manner pointed out in this
treatise, is the greater tendency of the latter to lapse into a state
of profound sleep, unless prevented by being roused and
directed by those present. Natural somnambulists seem to be impelled
to certain trains of action by internal impulses ; but, so far
as I have seen, the artificial somnambulists have an inclination to
remain at absolute rest, unless excited to action by some impression
from without. In compliance with such excitement, however, they evince
great acuteness and docility. There is also another remarkable
difference. It is stated, that although natural somnambulists cannot
remember, when awake, what they were engaged in when asleep, they have
a vivid recollection of it when in that state again ; but I have found
no parallel to this in the somnambulism induced by hypnotism.
By this I mean that they cannot explain what happened during the
former somnambulic state, but they may approximate to the words and
actions which had formerly manifested themselves, provided they are
placed under exactly similar circumstances. For the extent to which
peculiar manifestations may be brought out by manipulating the head
and face, at a certain stage of hypnotism, see Chapter VI, where
examples are given of memory as regarded events which happened during
the waking condition, whilst they seemed to have no
recollection of what happened during a former state of hypnotism.
As to the causes of common sleep, I may remark, that, by the
exercise of the mental operations, and the impressions conveyed
through the organs of special sense, muscular effort, and the
discharge of other animal functions, the brain becomes exhausted, and
ceases to be affected by ordinary stimuli, and lapses into that
dormant state we call sleep. During this condition it becomes
recruited, and fitted for again receiving its wonted impressions
through the organs of sense, and of holding intercourse with external
nature, and exercising those powers of voluntary motion and mental
function peculiar to the waking condition.
It will be generally admitted, that the most refreshing, and
therefore the most natural sleep, accompanies that condition
or languor which follows the moderate exercise or fatigue of
all the bodily and mental functions, rather than an undue
exercise of one or more to the neglect of the others.
It is long since it was observed that inordinate attention to one
subject caused dreaming, instead of sound sleep. It
will also be found that the absolute length of time during which any
function may be exercised, depends very much on the continuity
of its exertion, or its alternation with that of other functions ;
thus the mind may become confused and bewildered by continuing one
particular study for a length of time, but may be able to return to it
with energy and advantage, and prosecute the subject longer on the
whole, by varying it with study of a different nature; moreover,
bodily disease, and even insanity, frequently arises from following
the mind to be occupied inordinately by one particular object or
pursuit, whether that may be religion politics, avarice, schemes of
ambition, or any other passion, emotion, or object of unvaried
contemplation.
In like manner, continued and over-intense muscular effort very soon
exhausts the power of the muscles so exercised or over-exerted ; and
by keeping the eyes steadily and constantly exercised by gazing on a
coloured spot, they soon cease to be able to discern the boundaries of
the respective colours, (Muller) and ultimately seem scarcely to be
capable of distinguishing the spot at all. The same might be proved of
the other senses. In fine, alternate action and repose is the law
of animated nature. [Footnote: This subject is
beautifully illustrated by Muller, at page 14I0, Vol. II. (Baly's
translation) which I now quote:
'The excitement of the organic processes in the brain which attends
an active state of the mind, gradually renders that organ incapable of
maintaining the mental action, and thus induces sleep ; which is to
the brain what bodily fatigue is to other parts of the nervous system.
The cessation or remission of mental activity during sleep, in its
turn, however, affords an opportunity for the restoration of integrity
to the organic conditions of the cerebrum, by which they regain their
excitability. The brain, whose action is essential to the
manifestation of mind, obeys, in fact, the general law which prevails
over all organic phenomena - that the phenomena of life being
particular states induced in the organic structures, are attended with
changes in the constituent matter of these structures. Hence, the
longer the action of the mind is continued, the more incapable does
the brain become of supporting that action, and the more imperfectly
are the mental processes performed, until at length sensations cease
to be perceived, notwithstanding the impressions of external stimuli
continue. This is entirely analogous to what frequently occurs during
the waking state, in the case of individual sensations'.
I must beg leave to take one exception to the correctness of these
remarks, and that is, moderate exercise, I consider, instead
of exhausting, seems rather to act as a salutary stimulus,
and thus strengthens both organ and function. He then
goes on to state, most lucidly and fairly, 'Nor merely the action of
the mind, but the long continued exertion of other functions of animal
life, such as the senses or muscular actions, induces the same
exhaustion of the organic states of the brain, and thereby want of
sleep and sleep itself ; for these different systems of the body
participate in the change which the organic condition of any one of
them may undergo. Lastly, impairment of the normal organic state of
the brain, by the circulation through it of blood charged with
imperfectly assimilated nutriment, as after full meals in which
spirituous drinks have been taken, also induces sleep. The narcotic
medicaments act still more strongly by the change they produce in the
organic composition of the sensorium. Even the increased pressure of
the blood upon the brain, produced by the horizontal posture, may
become the cause of sleep'.
Here then is the opinion of this author in a few words. The exercise
of function is attended with a change, deterioration, or wasting of
the organic structure at a more rapid rate than can be repaired by the
slow, but regular and persistent organic renovation continually going
on in the whole system. A cessation of sentient, and mental, and
muscular functions, therefore, as happens in sleep, becomes necessary
to afford time for the renovation of the deteriorated organic
structures of the respective organs, and of the brain in particular,
which, in so eminent a degree, sympathises and participates in the
organic changes which have been induced in other organs.
Liebig's views seem confirmatory of this, where he points out the
fact, that the chemical principles of those substances which act most
energetically on the brain and nerves have a composition analogous to
that of the substance of the brain and nerves, as in the case of the
vegetable alkaloids. He believes that all the active principles which
produce powerfully poisonous or medicinal effects, in minute doses,
are compounds of nitrogen ; and that those compounds, being resolved
into their elements, take a share in the formation, or transformation,
of brain and nervous matter.
It is on this very principle, of over-exerting the attention, by
keeping it riveted to one subject or idea which is not of itself
of an exciting nature, and, over-exercising one set of muscles,
and the state of the strained eyes, with the suppressed respiration,
and general repose, which attend such experiments, which excites in
the brain and whole nervous system that peculiar state which I call
Hypnotism, or nervous sleep. The most striking proofs that it is
different from common sleep, are the extraordinary effects produced by
it. In deep abstraction of mind, it is well known, the individual
becomes unconscious of surrounding objects, and in some cases, even of
severe bodily infliction. During hypnotism, or nervous sleep, the
functions in action seem to be so intensely active, as must in
a great measure rob the others of that degree of nervous energy
necessary for exciting their sensibility. This alone may account for
much of the duIness of common feeling during the abnormal quickness
and extended range of action of certain other functions. [Footnote:
It was certainly presuming very much on the ignorance of others for
any one to attempt so to pervert the meaning of an author, as to twist
what M'Nish has written on the article 'Reverie', and represent it as
the basis of my theory. How does M'Nish define it? 'Reverie', he says,
'proceeds from an unusual quiescence of the brain, and inability of
the mind to direct itself strongly to any one point ; it is often the
prelude of sleep. There is a defect in the attention
which, instead of being fixed on one subject, wanders over
a thousand, and even on these is feebly and ineffectively
directed'. Now this, as everyone must own, is the very reverse
of what is induced by my plan, because I rivet the
attention to one idea, and the eyes to one point, as
the primary dud imperative conditions. Then, as to another
passage, 'That kind of reverie in which the mind is nearly divested of
all ideas, and approximates nearly to the state of sleep, I have
sometimes experienced while gazing long and intently upon a river. The
thoughts seem to glide away, one by one, upon the surface of the
stream, till the mind is emptied of them altogether. In this state we
see the glassy volume of the water moving past us, and hear its
murmur, but lose all power of fixing our attention definitively upon
any subject ; and either fall asleep, or are aroused by some
spontaneous reaction of the mind, or by some appeal to the senses
sufficiently strong to startle us from our reverie'. Now, I should
have read this passage a thousand times without discovering any
analogy between it and my theoretical views. They appear to me to be
'wide as the poles asunder'. Instead of ridding the mind of ideas 'one
by one, till the mind is emptied of them altogether,'
I endeavour to rid the mind at once of all ideas but one,
and to fixthat one in the mind even after passing into the
hypnotic state. This is very different from what happens in the
reverie referred to, in which M'Nish confesses the difficulty 'of
fixing our attention definitively upon any subject'. Again, so
far from a reaction of the mind being sufficient to rouse patients
from the hypnotic state, as in the reverie referred to, I can only
state, that I have never seen patients deeply affected come out of it
without assistance ; and I heard Lafontaine say, he had been unable to
restore the Frenchman who was with him for twelve hours on one
occasion, when a surgeon operated on him ; and I have read the report
of another, who operated on a patient at Stockport, 'Charlie',
according to my method, and, from having allowed him to go too far,
experienced no small difficulty in rousing him, nor could he be
restored to speech after much manipulation, and buffeting, and
friction, till he had swallowed nearly half a tumbler glass of
neat gin. To prevent misrepresentation, I shall quote the case as
reported in the Stockport Chronicle of 4th February, 1842
- 'To the final instance the lecturer now drew particular attention.
It was that of a young man, recognised by many in the room by the
familiar name of 'Charlie'. He was just entering upon the state of
somnolence, and the attention of the audience was directed to the
fact, that it was so indicated, by the different members becoming
rigid. Presently his eyelids closed, and he became as though
apparently under the influence of catalepsy. It was tried to make him
sit down, but his whole frame was perfectly rigid, and that object
could not therefore be accomplished. He was then laid on the floor,
and the usual means, with cold water added, were employed in order to
bring him to a state of consciousness. After a time these partially
succeeded, his limbs became once more supple, and he was set in a
chair, apparently conscious, though his eyelids were not yet open. He
was several times requested to open them, and as often made the most
vigorous efforts to do so, but was unable ; at last they were opened,
and it was discovered that the operation had so far influenced the
entire functions of his body, that he had for a time lost the power of
utterance, the muscles of the throat and tongue still remaining in a
state of the most perfect rigidity. In this state, and being affected
by a tremor which seized every part of his person, the patient was
conducted into an ante-room, and placed before a fire, while the
operator continued to rub the parts, in order to excite them to
renewed action, dud to restore animation. All this, however, had not
the desired effect for some time, during which the patient evinced
feelings of considerable surprise at his condition ; but nevertheless
was exceedingly lively, and made several efforts to speak, but could
not. At last half a tumbler glass of neat gin was brought, the greater
portion of which he drank off, and this partially restored the power
of utterance, for he was afterwards able to articulate a little, and
asked, though only in a whisper, for his hat ; and also requested that
some water might be mixed with the remaining portion of the gin. He
complained also of a sense of excessive fuIness of the stomach ; and
said, in answer to inquiries, that although not feeling cold, he was
yet unable to resist the tremor which had seized him'.]
Was not this a beautiful illustration of the facility with which
patients might be roused from this condition 'by a reaction of the
mind'? Nor was this the only Case that evening, in which great
difficulty had been experienced in rousing patients from the hypnotic
state.
The untoward result referred to in the note above, I have no doubt,
was the effect of permitting the experiment to be carried too far. No
such consequence has ever followed in any of my operations, and for
this reason, that I have always watched each case with close
attention, and aroused the patient the moment I saw the slightest
symptom of danger. I shall, therefore, now point out the symptoms of
danger, with the mode of arousing patients, and thus preventing
mischief which might ensue from want of due caution in the operator.
Whenever I observe the breathing very much oppressed, the face
greatly flushed, the rigidity excessive, or the action of the heart
very quick and tumultuous, I instantly arouse the patient, which I
have always readily and speedily succeeded in doing by a clap of the
hands, an abrupt shock on the arm or leg by striking them sharply with
the flat hand, pressure and friction over the eyelids, and by a
current of air wafted against the face. I have never failed by these
means to restore my patients very speedily.
I feel convinced hypnotism is not only a valuable, but also a
perfectly safe remedy for many complaints, if judiciously used; still
it ought not to be trifled with by ignorant persons for the mere sake
of gratifying idle curiosity. In all cases of apoplectic tendency, or
where there is aneurysm, or serious organic disease of the heart, it
ought not to be resorted to, excepting with the precaution, that it
may be in the mode calculated to depress the force and frequency of
the heart's action.
top
Chapter 4.
In passing into common sleep objects are perceived more and more
faintly, the eyelids close, and remain quiescent, and all the other
organs of special sense become gradually blunted, and cease to convey
their usual impressions to the brain, the limbs become flaccid from
cessation of muscular tone and action, the pulse and respiration
become slower, the pupils are turned upwards and inwards, and are contracted
(Muller).
In the hypnotic state, induced with the view of exhibiting what I
call the hypnotic phenomena, vision becomes more and more imperfect,
the eyelids are closed, but have, for a considerable time a vibratory
motion, (in some few they are forcibly closed, as by spasm of the
orbiculares) the organs of special sense, particularly of smell,
touch, and hearing, heat and cold, and resistance, are greatly exalted,
and afterwards become blunted, in a degree far beyond the torpor of
natural sleep; the pupils are turned upwards and inwards, but,
contrary to what happens in natural sleep, they are greatly
dilated, and highly insensible to light ; after a length of
time the pupils become contracted, whilst the eyes are still
insensible to light.
The pulse and respiration are, at first, slower than is natural, but
immediately on calling muscles into action, a tendency to
cataleptiform rigidity is assumed, with rapid pulse, and oppressed and
quick breathing. The limbs are thus maintained in a state of tonic
rigidity for any length of time I have yet thought it prudent
to try, instead of that state of flaccidity induced by common sleep ;
and the most remarkable circumstance is this; that there seems to be
no corresponding state of muscular exhaustion from such action. [Footnote:
The average of a great number of experiments gives me the following
results : The rise in the pulse from mere muscular effort, to enable
patients to keep their legs and arms extended for five minutes, is
about 20 per cent. When in the state of hypnotism it is upwards of 100
per cent. By arousing all the senses, and the head and neck, it will
speedily fall to 40 per cent, (that is, twice what it was when so
tested in the natural condition) and by rendering the whole muscles
limber, whilst the patient is in the state of hypnotism the pulse very
speedily falls to, or even below, the condition it was before the
experiment.]
In passing into natural sleep, any thing held in the hand is soon
allowed to drop from our grasp, but, in the artificial sleep now
referred to, it will be held more firmly than before falling asleep.
This is a very remarkable difference.
The power of balancing themselves is so great that I have never seen
one of these hypnotic somnambulists fall. The same is noted of natural
somnambulist. This is a remarkable fact, and would appear to occur in
this way, that they acquire the centre of gravity, as if by instinct,
in the most natural, and therefore, in the most graceful
manner, and if allowed to remain in this position, they speedily
become cataleptiformly and immovably fixed. From observing these two
facts, and the general tendency and taste for dancing displayed by
most patients on hearing lively music during hypnotism, the peculiarly
graceful and appropriate movement of many when thus excited, and the
varied and elegant postures they may be made to assume by slight
currents of air, and the faculty of retaining any position with so
much ease, I have hazarded the opinion, that the Greeks may have been
indebted to hypnotism for the perfection of their sculpture, and the
Fakirs for their wonderful feats of suspending their bodies by a leg
or an arm. [Footnote: It has been suggested to me, that it can
scarcely be doubted that the Bacchanalians, who had no feeling of
wounds, ('non sentit vuInera Moenas', - 0vid) and whose
condition was a stupor different from common sleep, ('Exsomnis
stupet Oevias', - Horace) were in the hypnotic condition
or nervous sleep, and therein excited to dance by music ; and that, as
uneducated maid-servants, when under the full influence of that state
of nerve, move with the grace and peculiar action of the most
accomplished dancers of pantomimic ballet, there is reason to believe,
not merely that the perfect grace exhibited in the attitudes
represented in ancient sculpture and painting, was derived from
studying the Bacchanalian and other mystic dancers, but that the
movements used by stage-dancers, in our days, have been transmitted to
us by continued imitation, through Italy, from the dancers in the
Greek mysteries. No person can see girls of humble education, under
the influence of music while in the nervous sleep, without perceiving,
that those individuals, if awake, could not move with the elegance
they exhibit under that influence. The reason of such grace probably
is, that it arises from the simple and pure effects of nature to
balance the body perfectly in all its complicated movements while the
power of sight is suspended.]
It thus clearly appears that it differs from common sleep in many
respects, that there is first a state of excitement as with opium, and
wine, and spirits, and afterwards a state of corresponding deep
depression or torpor.
In the case of two patients, symptoms very much the same as those
produced in them by the laughing gas, were produced twice on each
patient, and the only time I know of their having been hypnotised. One
lost the power of speech for two hours, as happened also after the
gas. Both these patients had hypnotised themselves. There is a
remarkable difference between the hypnotic condition, and that induced
by the nitrous oxide. In the latter there is great, almost
irresistible inclination to general muscular effort, as well
as laughter ; in the former there seems to be no inclination to any
bodily effort, unless excited by impressions from without.
When the latter are used, there is a remarkable difference again in
the power of locomotion and accurate balancing of themselves, when
contrasted with the condition of intoxication from wine or spirits,
where the limbs become partially paralysed, whilst the judgement
remains pretty clear and acute. The state of muscular quiescence, with
acute hearing, and dreamy, glowing imagination, approximates it
somewhat to the condition induced by conium.
During the course of last spring some lectures were delivered in
this town to prove that the mesmeric phenomena might be
induced by an 'undue continuance or repetition of the same sensible
impression' on any of the senses. Immediately after the first lecture
I instituted experiments according to this plan, but very soon
ascertained, that the sleep induced by this mode of operating, unless
through the eye, was nothing more than NATURAL or common sleep,
excepting in patients who had had the impressibility stamped on
them, by having been previously mesmerised or hypnotised. The
lecturer concluded his course by stating his opinion, that he knew no
sleep but natural or common sleep ; and by representing that he
considered the effects produced by the different modes to be the same.
[Footnote: This being his belief, there could be no novelty in
his views. The following was the language of Cullen, long before he
was born, 'If the mind is attached to a single sensation, it is
brought very nearly to the state of the total absence of impressions ;
or, in other words, to the state most closely bordering upon sleep ;
remove those stimuli which keep it employed, and sleep ensues at any
time'.]
M'Nish also writes, 'Attention to a single sensation has the same
effect (of inducing slumber). This has been exemplified in the case of
all kinds of monotony, where there is a want of variety to stimulate
the ideas, and keep them on the alert'.
And again M'Nish writes, 'I have often coaxed myself to sleep by
internally repeating half a dozen times any well known rhyme. Whilst
doing so the ideas must be strictly directed to this particular theme,
and prevented from wandering'. He then adds, that the great secret is
to compel the mind to depart from its favourite train of thought, into
which it has a tendency to run, 'and address itself solely to the verbal
repetition of what is substituted in its place' ; and farther adds,
'the more the mind is brought to turn upon a single impression,
the more closely it is made to approach to the state of sleep, which
is the total absence of all impressions'. Which also, some forty years
ago, wrote thus, 'Sleep is promoted by tranquillity of mind, * * * by
gently and uniformly affecting one of the senses; for
instance, by music or reading ; and lastly, a gentle external motion
of the whole body, as by rocking or sailing'. Counting and repeating a
few words have been also long and generally known and resorted to for
the purpose of procuring sleep.
Let any one read attentively the following extract from the Medical
Gazette of February 24, 1838, on the power of weak monotonous
impressions on the senses having the power of inducing sleep, and many
phenomena usually attributed to mesmerism, and say what merit could be
due to a person acquainted with the article referred to, for recording
a note to the same effects some six or eight months thereafter,
and that without having instituted a single experiment to prove the
correctness of the hypothesis? 'For the other slight symptoms' (others
enumerated having been attributed to imagination or emotion of mind)
'of vapours, drowsiness, and at last natural sleep, no other cause
need be sought than the tediousness and ennui of passing the hands for
more or less than an hour over the most sensitive parts of the body.
This is only an instance of the well known effect of weak, monotonous
impressions on the senses inducing sleep ; analogous examples are
found in the soothing influence of a body seen slowly vibrating, or of
a distant calm scene, or the motions of the waves, or of quivering
leaves ; or in impressions on the sense of learning by the sound of a
waterfall, the rippling of billows, the humming of insects, the low
howling of the winds, the voice of a dull reader ; or on the nerves of
common sensation by gentle friction of the temple or eyebrow, or
any sensitive part of the body ; the rocking of a cradle ; any
slow and regular motion of the limbs or trunk ; all these instances
show that the effect of monotonous impressions on the senses is to
produce, in most persons, tranquillity, or drowsiness, and ultimately
sleep'.
Where, then, is the great merit of any one having recorded a note
six or eight months after this was published, that these phenomena
were induced by 'the undue continuance and repetition of the same
sensible impression!'
I believe most, if not all the patients this gentleman exhibited at
his lectures had been previously mesmerised or hypnotised, which, if I
am correct in this supposition, from the circumstances already
referred to, (see page 36, and note, page 61) would completely nullify
the importance of his apparent results. However, I have never
heard of his having operated successfully, and exhibited the
phenomena on numbers of patients taken indiscriminately from a mixed
audience, ,who had never been operated on before ; or produced
curative results such as I have so repeatedly done. I therefore
consider it a fair inference, that until the same phenomena are
produced by his method in cases of persons which have never
been hypnotised or mesmerised, nothing is proved beyond the fact which
I have so often urged, namely, the power of imagination, sympathy,
and habit, in producing the expected effects ON THOSE PREVIOUSLY
IMPRESSED. [Footnote: A very decided proof of this was
exhibited at one of my lectures, where, as may be seen from the report
of it, twenty-two who had been operated on before, laid hold of
different parts of each other's persons or dresses, and by
concentrating their attention to that act, and anticipating the
effect, they all became hypnotised in about a minute. After another
lecture, in the ante-room, sixteen who bad been hypnotised formerly,
stood up in the same manner, and also one who had never
been hypnotised. In about a minute all were affected excepting
the latter. I then operated on him alone in my usual way, and in
two or three minutes he was very decidedly affected. Suffice it to
say, I have varied my experiments in every possible form, and clearly
proved the power of imagination over those previously impressed,
as the patients have become hypnotised or not by the same appliance,
accordingly to the result which they previously expected. This readily
accounts for the result of Mr Wakley's experiments with the 0keys.]
From overlooking another important fact which I have repeatedly
explained, that all the phenomena are consecutive, that is, first
increased sensibility, inobility, and docility, and afterwards a
subsidence into insensibility and cataleptiform rigidity, this
gentleman, by mistaking and exhibiting the primary phenomena
for the secondary, seems to have managed to deceive both
himself and some others who are satisfied to look at such matters
loosely. This, however, is confounding things which are in
themselves essentially different. I beg especial attention to the
note below. [FOOTNOTE: In illustration of this, I may here
state the following remarkable facts, which have been frequently
repeated before many most competent witnesses, and of which,
therefore, I consider there can be no doubt.]
The first symptoms after the induction of the hypnotic state, and
extending the limbs, are those of extreme excitement of all the organs
of sense, sight excepted. I have ascertained by accurate measurement,
that the hearing is about twelve times more acute than in the natural
condition. Thus a patient who could not hear the tick of a watch
beyond 3 feet when awake, could do so when hypnotised at the distance
of 35 feet, and walk to it in a direct line, without difficulty or
hesitation. Smell is in like manner, wonderfully exalted ; one patient
has been able to trace a rose through the air when held 46 feet from
her. May this not account for the fact of Dr Elliotson's patient 0key,
discovering the peculiar odour of patients in articulo mortis?
when she said on passing them, 'there is Jack'. The tactual
sensibility is so great, that the slightest touch is felt, and will
call into action corresponding muscles, which will also be found to
exert a most inordinate power. The sense of heat, cold, and
resistance, are also exalted to that degree, as to enable the patient
to feel anything without actual contact, in some cases at a
considerable distance, (18 or 20 inches) if the temperature is very
different from that of the body ; and some will feel a breath of air
from the lips, or the blast of a pair of bellows, at the distance of
50, or even 90 feet, and bend from it, and, by making a back current,
as by waving the hand or a fan, will move in the opposite direction.
The patient has a tendency to approach to, or recede from
impressions, according as they are agreeable or disagreeable, either
in quality or intensity. Thus, they will approach to soft sounds,
but they will recede from loud sounds, however harmonious. A discord,
such as two semi-tones sounded at same time, however soft,
will cause a sensitive patient to shudder and recede when hypnotised,
although ignorant of music, and not at all disagreeably affected by
such discord when awake. By allowing a little sure to elapse, and the
patient to be in a state of quietude, he will lapse into the opposite
extreme, of rigidity and torpor of all the senses, so that he
will not hear the loudest noise, nor smell the most fragrant or
pungent odour ; nor feel what is either hot or cold, although not only
approximated to, but brought into actual contact with, the skin. He
may now be pricked, or pinched, or maimed, without evincing the
slightest symptom of pain or sensibility, and the limbs will remain
rigidly fixed. At this stage a puff of wind directed against any organ
instantaneously rouses it to inordinate sensibility, and the
rigid muscles to a state of mobility. Thus, the patient may be
unconscious of the loudest noise, but by simply causing a current of
air to come against the ear, a very moderate noise will instantly
be heard so intensely as to make the patient start and shiver
violently, although the whole body had immediately before been rigidly
cataleptiform. A rose, valerian, or asafoetida, or strongest liquor
ammonioe, may have been held close under the nostrils without
being perceived, but a puff of wind directed against the nostrils will
instantly rouse the sense so much, that supposing the rose had been
carried 46 feet distant, the patient has instantly set off in pursuit
of it ; and even whilst the eyes were bandaged, reached it as
certainly as a dog traces out game ; but, as respects valerian or
asafoetida, will rush from the unpleasant smell, with the
greatest haste. The same with the sense of touch.
The remarkable fact that the whole senses may have been in the state
of profound torpor, and the body in a state of rigidity, and yet by
very gentle pressure over the eyeballs, the patient shall be instantly
roused to the waking condition, as regards all the senses, and
mobility of the head and neck, in short to all parts supplied by
nerves originating above the origin of the fifth pair, and those
inosculating with them, and will not be affected by simple mechanical
appliance to other organs of sense, is a striking proof that there
exists some remarkable connection between the state of the eyes, and
condition of the brain dud spinal cord during the hypnotic state.
This is also a remarkably good illustration of the propriety of Mr
Mayo's designation of the origin of the fifth pair of nerves, which he
styles 'the dynamic centre of the nervous system'. (The Nervous
System, and its Functions, p.27)
Another remarkable proof to the same effect is this ; supposing the
same state of torpor of all the senses, and rigidity of the body and
limbs to exist, a puts of air, or gentle pressure against ONE eye will
restore sight to that eye, and sense and mobility to one
half of the body - the same side as the eye operated on - but will
leave the other eye insensible, and the other half of the body rigid
and torpid as before. Neither hearing nor smell, however, are restored
in this case to either side. Thus, by one mode of acting through the
eye, we reduce the patient to a state of hemiplegia, by the other to
that of paraplegia, as regards both sense and motion. In many cases,
when the patient has been hypnotised by looking sideways, this gives a
tendency to the body to turn round in that direction when asleep.
It seemed puzzling, that by acting on one eye, both sense and motion
could be communicated to the same side of the body, seeing the
motor influence is communicated from the opposite hemisphere of
the brain. It has occurred to me that the partial decussation of
the optic nerves may account for this, and that this partial
decussation may be for the express purpose of perfecting the union of
sensation and motion through the eyes, 'on which we lean as on
crutches' ; thus enabling us to balance ourselves so much more
perfectly than we could otherwise have done.
There is another most remarkable circumstance, that whilst the
patient is in the state of torpor and rigidity, we may pass powerful
shocks of the galvanic battery through the arms, so as to cause
violent contortions of them, without his evincing the slightest
symptom of perceiving the shocks, either by movement of the head or
neck, or expression of the countenance. On partially arousing the head
and neck, as by gentle pressure on the eyes, or passing a current of
air against the face, the same shocks will be felt, as evinced
by the movements of the head and neck, the contortions of the face,
and the whine, moan, or scream of the patient. All this may happen, as
I have witnessed innumerable times, and the patient be altogether
unconscious of it when roused from the hypnotic condition.
Moreover, whist the patient is in the condition to be unconscious of
the shock passed through the arms whilst a rod is placed in each hand,
if one of the rods is applied to any part of the head, or neck, or
face, in short, to any part, which is set at liberty by acting on
both eyes, as formerly referred to, he will instantly manifest
symptoms of feeling a shock, though it be much less powerful than that
which had failed to produce any sensation or consciousness when passed
through both arms. This might readily be accounted for on the
principle of the circuit being shortened, and also by one of the rods
being nearer the centre of the sensorium ; but that it depends on
something else is apparent from the following fact : Without moving
the rod placed on the neck, head, or face, carry the other rod from
the hand, to any other part of the head, neck, or face, and all
evidence of feeling will disappear, unless the power of
the galvanic current is increased.
Analogous to this is another most puzzling phenomenon : The brain
being in a state of torpor, the limbs rigid, and the skin insensible
to pricking, pinching, heat or cold, by gently pressing the point of
one or two fingers against the back of the hand, or any other part of
the extremity, the rigidity will very speedily give place to mobility,
and quivering of the arm, hand, and fingers, and which is greatly
increased by pressing another finger against the neck, head, or face.
Indeed, in the latter case, the commotion of the whole body is as
violent in some patients as from shocks of the galvanic battery. By
placing BOTH fingers on any part of the head, face, or neck, the
commotion almost, or entirely ceases. By pinching the skin of the hand
or arm with one finger and thumb, and the skin of the neck or face
with the other, no effect is produced. Pressure, made, with insulating
rods, glass, or sealing wax, is followed by the same phenomena as when
done by the points of the fingers. The flat hand applied has very
little effect. The pressure being made against both hands, the arms
are contorted, and if the head is partially de-hypnotised, the patient
will complain of pins running into the fingers, especially if one
point of contact is the hand, and the other the face or head. These
phenomena do not occur whilst the skin remains sensible to pricking or
pinching.
Moreover, during the state of cataleptiform rigidity, the
circulation becomes greatly accelerated, in many cases it has more
than double the natural velocity ; and may be brought down to the
natural standard, in most cases in less than a minute, by reducing the
cataleptiform condition. It is also found, that it may be kept at any
intermediate condition between these two extremes, according to the
manipulations used ; and that the blood is circulated with less force
(the pulse being always contracted) in the rigid limbs,
and sent in correspondingly greater quantity and force into those
parts which are not directly subjected to the pressure of rigid
muscles. It is also important to note, that by acting on both eyes in
the manner required to induce the state of paraplegia, as already
explained, the force and frequency of the heart's action may be as
speedily and perceptibly diminished, as the action of a steam engine
by turning off the steam. By again fixing the eyes, its former force
and velocity will be almost as speedily restored, as can be
satisfactorily proved to anyone who keeps his ear applied to the chest
during these experiments. The amount of change in the pulse, by acting
on the two eyes, and thus liberating the organs of special sense, and
the head and neck, is about 60 per cent of the actual rise of the
pulse when at the maximum above the ordinary velocity of the
circulation. We might therefore, I think, a priori, infer,
that in this new condition of the nervous system we have acquired an
important power to act with.
N.B. - It is to be observed, that owing to the extreme acuteness of
hearing during the first stage of hypnotism, it is extremely apt to
mislead the operator, or those who do not understand this fact, during
operations on the acuteness of the other senses, such as smell,
currents of air, and heat and cold. To avoid such mistakes, therefore,
it is best to allow the hearing to disappear, by which time all the
other senses will have gone to rest, with the exception of the
susceptibility to be affected by a current of air. I allow all the
senses to become dormant, and then rouse only the one I wish to
exhibit in the state of exalted function, when operating carefully.
Of all the circumstances connected with the artificial sleep which I
induce, nothing so strongly marks the difference between it and natural
sleep as the wonderful power the former evinces in curing many
diseases of long standing, and which had resisted natural sleep, and
every known agency, for years, e.g. patients who have been born deaf
and dumb, of various ages, up to 32 years, had continued without the
power of hearing sound until the time they were operated on by me, and
yet they were enabled to do so by being kept in the hypnotic state for
eight, ten, or twelve minutes, and have had their hearing still
farther improved by a repetition of similar operations. Now, supposing
these patients to have spent six hours out of twenty-four in sleep,
many of them had had four, five, six, or eight years of continuous
sleep, but still awoke as they lay down, incapable of hearing sound,
and yet they had some degree of it communicated to them by a few minutes
of Hypnotism. Can any stronger proof be wanted, or adduced,
than this, that it is very different from common sleep? A
lady, 54 years of age, had been suffering for 16 years from incipient
amaurosis. According to the same ratio, she must have had four years
of sleep, but instead of improving she was every month getting worse,
and when she called on me, could with difficulty read two words of the
largest heading of a newspaper. After eight minutes hypnotic
sleep, however, she could read the other words, and in three minutes
more, the whole of the smaller heading, soon after a smaller sized
type, and the same afternoon, with the aid of her glasses, read the
118th Psalm, 29 verses, in the small diamond Polyglot
Bible, which for years had been a sealed book to her. There has also
been a most remarkable improvement in this lady's general health since
she was hypnotised. Is there any individual who can fail to see, in
this case, something different from common sleep? Another lady, 44
years of age, had required glasses 22 years, to enable her to see to
sew, read, or write. She had thus five years and a-half of sleep, but
the sight was still getting worse, so that, before being hypnotised,
she could not distinguish the capitals in the advertising columns of a
newspaper. After being hypnotised, however, she could, in a few
minutes, see to read the large and second heading of the newspaper,
and next day, to make herself a blond cap, threading her needle
without the aid of glasses. This lady's daughter, who had been
compelled to use glasses for two years, was enabled to dispense with
them, after being once hypnotised. It is also important to
note, that all these three, as well as many others, were agreeably
surprised by improvement of memory after being hypnotised. The
memory of one was so bad that she was often forced to go upstairs
several times before she could remember what she went for, and could
scarcely carry on a conversation ; but all this remnant of a slight
paralytic affection is gone, by the same operations which roused the
optic nerves, and restored the sight. Now, with such cases as these,
who can doubt that there is a real difference in the state of the
brain and nervous system generally, during the hypnotic sleep, from
that which occurs in common sleep? The same might be urged from
various other diseases cured or relieved by this process, but I shall
only briefly refer to a few.
In the second part of this treatise, where the cases are recorded,
will be found many examples of the curative power of hypnotism,
equally remarkable with those to which I have just referred : such as
Tic Doloureux ; Nervous headache ; Spinal irritation ; Neuralgia of
the heart ; Palpitation and intermittent action of the heart ;
Epilepsy ; Rheumatism ; Paralysis ; Distortions and tonic spasm, etc.
I shall here give a few particulars of a case which shows in a most
remarkable degree the difference of this and common sleep, or that
induced by opium and the whole range of medicines of that class. Miss
Collins, of Newark, Nottinghamshire, had a spasmodic seizure during
the night, by which her head was bound firmly to her left shoulder.
The most energetic and well directed means, under a most talented
physician, and aided by the opinion of Sir Benjamin Brodie, had been
tried, as far as known remedies could be carried (amongst other means,
narcotics, in as large doses as were compatible with the safety of the
patient) and although she was carefully watched by night and by day,
there bad never been the slightest relaxation of the spasm, which had
continued nearly six months. When I first examined her, no force I was
capable of exerting could succeed in separating the head and shoulder
in the slightest degree. Experience led me to hope, however, that I
might be able to do so after she was hypnotised. Having requested all
present, excepting the patient, her father, and her physician, to
retire, I hypnotised her, and in three minutes from commencing the
operation, with the most perfect ease to myself, and without the
slightest pain to the patient, her head was inclined in the opposite
direction, and in two minutes more she was roused, and was quite
straight. I visited this patient only three times, after which she
returned home. Shortly afterwards, she had a nervous twitching of the
head, and on one occasion it was again drawn to her shoulder. Dr
Chawner, however, hypnotised her as he had seen me do, and put it
right immediately ; and she is now (about twelve months after she was
hypnotised) in perfect health, 'her head quite straight, and she has
perfect control over the muscles of the neck' (See cases).
Miss E Atkinson had been unable to speak above a whisper for four
years and a half, notwithstanding every known remedy had been
perseveringly adopted, under able practitioners. After the ninth
hypnotic operation she could speak aloud without effort, and has
continued quite well ever since - now about nine months. (See case at
length, Part II.)
The extraordinary effects of a few minutes hypnotism, manifested in
such cases (so very different from what we realise by the application
of ordinary means) may appear startling to those unacquainted with the
remarkable powers of this process. I have been recommended, on this
account, to conceal the fact of the rapidity and extent of the changes
induced, as many may consider the thingimpossible, and thus be
led to reject the less startling, although not more
true, reports of its beneficial action in other cases. In recording
the cases, however, I have considered it my duty to record facts
as I found them, and to make no compromise for the sake of
accommodating them to the preconceived notions or prejudices of
others.
It may be proper to add, however, that I have afforded opportunities
to many eminent professional and scientific gentlemen to see the
patients, and investigate for themselves the real state of these
respective cases ; and to them I can confidently appeal is to the
accuracy and fidelity of the reports of most of the cases recorded in
this treatise.
After such evidence as this, no one can reasonably doubt that there
is a remarkable difference between hypnotism and natural sleep, and
that it is a valuable addition to our therapeutic means.
How these extraordinary effects are produced, it may be impossible
absolutely to decide. One thing, however, I am certain of, that, in
this condition, besides the peculiar impression directly made on the
nervous centres, by which the mind is for the time 'thrown out of
gear', and which enables us, in a remarkable manner, to localise or
concentrate the nervous energy, or seasonal power, to any particular
point or function, instead of the more equal distribution which exists
in the ordinary condition, we have also an extraordinary power of
acting on the capillaries, and of increasing and diminishing the force
and frequency of the circulation, locally and generally. [Footnote:
By this I mean that any one examining the pulse by the radial artery,
whilst the patient has his arms in the cataleptiform condition, and
held at right angles with his body, (and when, of course, the
circulation can only be influenced by the state of rigidity or
flaccidity of the muscles) it will be found feeble or contracted, but
the moment the rigidity of the muscles is reduced, by blowing on or
fanning them, the pulse will become much more developed. This, of
course, which may, be done without the patient being conscious of the
experiment, is totally different from what may be displayed as a
trick, by a person voluntarily compressing the axillary and brachial
arteries, by drawing his arms firmly against his side. The former is
independent of volition, the latter is entirely voluntary, and a mere
trick.]
This can be done in a most remarkable degree, both as regards the
extent and rapidity of these changes. [Footnote: The first
time I ever had an opportunity of examining a patient minutely, or of
feeling the pulse of one, under the mesmeric influence, was on the 19th
November, 184I. I was much struck with the state of the pulse at the
wrist - so small and rapid as, combined with the state of tremor, or
slight subsultus in the arm, rendered it impossible to count it
accurately at the wrist. This circumstance induced me to reckon the
velocity of the pulse by the carotid artery, as will be found recorded
in the 'Manchester Guardian' of the 24th of that month. I
adduced this as the cause of the discrepancy between the numeration of
the pulse by others and myself, that I had counted it by the
carotid artery, and considered it impossible for any one to reckon
it correctly by the radial artery in such a case. The injected state
of the conjunctival membrane of the eye, and the whole capillary
system in the neck, head, and face, was so apparent, as Dr Radford
very correctly stated, that no one near the patient could fail to
observe it : this, together with the cold hands and contracted pulse
at the wrist, led me to infer, that the rigid state of the
cataleptiform muscles, opposed the free transmission of the blood
through the extremities, and would thus cause increased action in the
heart and determination to the brain and spinal cord, as resulted from
the ingenious experiments of my late friend Dr Kellie, for speedily
terminating the cold stage of ague, by putting a tourniquet round one
of the extremities.]
And, moreover, changes from absolute insensibility to the most
exalted sensibility, may be effected at a certain stage, almost with
the rapidity of thought, as exemplified at page 63. On the whole, I
consider it is of great importance to have acquired a knowledge of how
these effects can be produced and generally applied, and turned to
advantage in the cure of disease, although. we should never ascertain
the real proximate cause, or principle through which we produce our
effects. Who can tell how, or why, quinine and arsenic cure
intermittent fever ? They are, nevertheless, well known to do so, and
are prescribed accordingly.
Whilst I feel assured from personal experience, and the testimony of
professional friends, on whose judgement and candour I can implicitly
rely, that in this we have acquired an important curative agency for
a certain class of diseases, I desire it to be distinctly
understood, as already stated, that I by no means wish to hold it up
as a universal remedy. I believe it is capable of doing great good, if
judiciously applied. Diseases evince totally different pathological
conditions, and the treatment ought to be varied accordingly. We have,
therefore, no right to expect to find a universal remedy either in
this, or any other, method of treatment.
top
Chapter 5.
WHEN I had ascertained that Hypnotism was important as a curative
power, and that the prejudices existing against it in the public mind,
as to its having an immoral tendency, were erroneous; and the idea,
that it was calculated to sap the foundation of the Christian creed,
by suggesting that the Gospel miracles might have been wrought by this
agency, was quite unfounded and absurd, I felt it to be a duty I owed
to the cause of humanity, and my profession, to use my best endeavours
to remove those fallacies, so that the profession generally might be
at liberty to prosecute the inquiry, and apply it practically, without
hazarding their personal and professional interest, by prosecuting it
in opposition to popular prejudice. It appeared to me there was no
mode so likely to insure this happy consummation as delivering
lectures on the subject to mixed audiences. The public could thus have
demonstrative proof of its practical utility; and, when it was proved
to proceed from a law of the animal economy, and that the patient
could only be affected in accordance with his own free will and
consent, and not, as the animal magnetizers contend, through the
irresistible power of volitions and passes of the mesmerizers, which
might be done in secret and at a distance, the ground of charge as to
my agency having an immoral tendency, must at once fall to the ground.
I have reason to believe my labours have not been altogether
unsuccessful, in removing the popular prejudices; adint I hope that
the more liberal of my professional brethren, now that they I;iiuw my
true motives of action, in giving lectures to mixed audiences, instead
of confining them to the profession only, iiid especially as I made no
secret of my modes of operating, will be inclined to approve rather
than blame me, for the course I have taken in this respect. From some
peculiar views, I .was led to make experiments, by which I hoped to
obtain natural or refreshing sleep, and the results were quite
satisfactory. I have thus succeeded in making a patient, who, when
operated upon in the usual way, was highly susceptible, afiii disposed
to become strongly cataleptic, with rapid pulse and oppressed
breathing, remain in a sound sleep for upwards of three hours, with
all the muscles flaccid, and the pulse and respiration slower than
natural, when operated on in this manner. All this difference arises
from the simple circumstance of the position into which the eyes are
placed during the operation, namely, closing the eyelids, and bringing
the eyes Inosely upwards, as if looking at an object at a great
distance, the eye-balls being turned up only gently, so as to cause
dilatation of the pupil, as already explained; and the limbs placed so
as to relax the muscles as much as possible, and thus prevent
acceleration of the pulse.
I was led to the adoption of this method from the following train of
reasoning. If, as I inferred was the case, the spasmodic tendency was
reflected to the muscular system generally, from the semiparalyzed
state of the branches of the third pair of nerves (which supply the
levatores palpebrarum (the muscles that lift the eylids - Dylan) and
irides (muscles that contract the pupil - Dylan)) during the continued
fixed stare and straining of the eyes, I thought, were I to insure all
the other concomitant requirements for procuring hypnotism, minus the
strain on the levators and irides, I ought to procure refreshing
sleep, without rigidity of muscle or quickened circulation. By closing
the eyelids, the first could be obtained, and by turning the eyes up
loosely, which dilates the pupils, the other would also be attained; I
therefore tried the experiment, which, as already noted, proved most
successful.
I think the plan I have just pointed out is quite as simple, and I
feel assured it will prove as efficacious in procuring "sleep at
will" as that of Gardener, lately published by Dr Biuns. I may
add, that I publicly stated my plan at my lectures in LoTidoI1, un
tile lst and id lliaieh, 1842, which was at least five or six months
prior to the publication of Dr Binns's work. I bad also done the same
at my lectures in Liverpool, about six weeks before that last period.
Mr Barrallier, an intelligent surgeon, of Milford, who investigated
the subject of Hypnotism with much zeal and success, and published
some interesting experiments on the subject in the Medical Times, also
referred to the case of a gentleman in that town, whom he had heard,
of as having been in the habit of procuring sleep immediately 'by
keeping his eyes fixed' for a few minutes iii one direction. Until he
adopted this method be scarcely slept at all. For various modes of
procuring sleep see pages 58-60 of this treatise.
In reference to my original theory, Dr Binns, at page 372, calls in
question the justice of my allegation, that during Hypnotism, natural
or artificial, there should be any imperfect arterialization of the
blood, notwithstanding the suppressed or modified respiration and
circulation. He has adduced no arguments, however, to convince me to
the contrary; and I again repent my conviction, that such condition of
the blood does exist, and is a cause of ordinary sleep; and that the
still more intense state of torpor, iixi a certain state of
Neuro-Hypnotism, results from a still less perfectly purified blood;
and, on the other hand, that the dreamy and exalted states arise from
different degrees of stimulating properties of the blood, from being
more highly arterialized at various stages, together with the velocity
of circulation, and pressure or tension on the brain during the
cataleptiform state.
top
Chapter 6.
I have no doubt that some of the views already advanced, and the
facts on which they are grounded, have appeared startling to many of
my readers, and I feel assured the subject to be discussed in the
following chapter must be still more so; namely, that during
hypnotism, we acquire the power, through the nerves of common
sensation, of rousing any sentiment, feeling, passion, or emotion, and
any mental manifestation, according to our mode of manipulating the
patient. This is what has been designated phreno-magnetism by the
discoverers of these curious phenomena, but which, in accordance with
my nomenclature, I shall designate phreno-hypnotism. It appears with
this, as with many other discoveries that similar investigations were
going forward at the same time in England and America, while the
discoverers were without the knowledge of each other's views or
proceedings, and that the results of their experiments led all parties
to form analogous conclusions.
It must be evident to every one who reflects deeply and
dispassionately on the subject, that if we really can thus acquire
such power as to rouse into great activity any faculty or propensity,
whilst we diminish the activity of antagonist faculties, we must
thereby acquire an important power for meliorating the moral,
intellectual, and physical condition of man. I shall have no
difficulty in adducing sufficient proof, that the human mind can
be so developed and acted on through the bodily organs; but,
before entering into a detail of the modes of doing so, I shall
endeavour to remove a prejudice against the discussion of this
subject, which has arisen from the unhappy circumstance that some of
those who promulgated this doctrine have professed a belief in
materialism. Such an avowal was indeed calculated to excite, not the
prejudices, but the sound principles, of Christian society in general
against the reception or dispassionate consideration of the facts on
which it rested. For my own part, I can see nothing in the subject to
warrant such conclusions as the materialists have avowed; and truth is
not to be rejected, because misguided men attempt to build upon it a
hollow and unseemly superstructure. The following are my views of the
relation which subsists betwixt mind and matter:- I look upon the
brain simply as the organ of the mind, and the bodily organs
as the instruments for upholding the integrity of the bodily frame,
and for acquiring and extending its communion with external nature in
our present state of existence. That the mind acts on matter, and is
acted on by matter, according to the quality and quantity, and
relative disposition of cerebral development. This, however, does not
imply, that mind is a mere attribute of matter. [Footnote: "A
few sounds acting on the tympanum of the ear, or a few black and small
figures scribbled on a piece of white paper (see Mr Renuell's
pamphlet) have been known to knock a man down as effectually as a
sledge hammer, and to deprive him not only of vision, but even of
life. Here, then, we have instances of mind acting upon matter, and I
by no means affirm that matter does not also act upon mind; for to
those who advocate the intimate connection between body and mind,
these reciprocities of action are easily reconcileable; but this will
be an insuperable difficulty to those who affirm the identity of mind
and body." Again, "This intimate union between body and mind
is, in fact, analogous to all that we see, and feel, and comprehend.
Thus, we observe that the material stimuli of alcohol, or of opium,
act upon the mind through the body, and that the moral stimuli of
love, or of anger, act upon the body through the mind: these are
reciprocities of action that establish the principle of connection
between the two, but are fatal to that of an identity." - "Does
not every passion of the mind act directly, primarily, and, as it
were, per se upon the body, with greater or with lesser
influence in proportion to their force? Does not the activity belong
on this occasion to the mind, and the mere passiveness to the body?
Does not the quickened circulation follow the anger, the start
the surprise, and the swoon the sorrow? Do not these instances, and a
thousand others, clearly convince us that priority of action here
belongs to the mind, and not to the body? and those who deny this,
are reduced to the ridiculous absurdity of attempting to prove that a
man is frightened because he runs away, not that he runs away because
be is frightened, and that the motion produces the terror, not the
terror the motion." - Colton's Lacon. The same author
also urges the argument effectively by an appeal to the fact of mania
being so frequently produced by moral causes, and the success
which has attended the treatment of the insane by strict attention to
moral management.] My thinking and willing, and acting, so as
to influence the mental and bodily condition of another, surely does
not destroy our separate individuality? As well might we say, that the
refined compositions of a Mozart or Beethoven, which were conveyed to
the ears of their delighted auditors through different instruments,
were created by the thought and will of the instruments.
It appears to me quite clear, that the musician might conceive, and
compose, and record every idea, whilst others could have no conception
of their nature or merits, unless communicated through an appropriate
instrument or instruments. The musician and instrument, therefore, are
distinct in their nature, is the soul and the bodily organs are
essentially distinct from each other.
I shall endeavour to illustrate my views by the following simile.
Suppose the instrument is good, and well fitted for expressing musical
composition, it is evident, that it will better convey the beauties of
the composition, than if represented by a bad or indifferent
instrument; and will also afford more delight, and satisfaction, and
encouragement to the farther exertions of the composer, than if
performed on a bad instrument. Just so the mind furnished with a well
developed brain. Supposing the musical instrument is very perfect in
some parts, but very imperfect in others, it is
evident, that the musician can afford more pleasure to others, as well
as more satisfaction to himself, by playing on the more perfect parts.
Then, supposing the parts played on capable of becoming improved, by
being so exercised, (which is the case with several instruments,
as the violin,) it is clear, that there will be greater and greater
inducement for the musician to confine himself to the better parts of
the instrument, and thus, by concentrating his whole energies to these
points, be will more and more enamour himself, as well as his
auditors, by the perfection of his performances.
This is exactly what I conceive takes place in reference to the
brain, supposing different parts to be appropriated as the instruments
for the manifestation of different mental functions. Every part of the
human frame is continually undergoing the process of waste and repair
- that is to say, the molecular particles of the various organs are
continually changing, and moderate exercise tends to increased
development and power, whilst inaction has the opposite
tendency. This no one will deny. The analogy, therefore, is complete.
The soul or mind, by being exercised judiciously in a particular
direction, strengthens some peculiar organ, and acquires precision
from habit, which gives a tendency to perseverance in the same course
of action; and, by refraining from certain practices, the
corresponding organs become feeble, and thus exercise a less powerful
influence on the mind. Thus we can account for the power of habit,
both physical and mental, each tending to strengthen the other by
correct training; and it is on this principle that we can hope to
meliorate the condition of the vicious members of society, by
separating them from bad companions and practices, and encouraging
them in the exercise of virtuous habits.
Moreover, the mind of the musician may conceive and excite into
activity the corresponding organs of the brain; these may react on his
corporeal organs, and excite into activity the silent lyre; all these
links of intercommunication may be perfected, without conveying any
corresponding feeling or emotion to the minds of others, unless they
are provided with appropriate recipient organs (musical ears) for
conveying to their brains certain vibrations, and thus inducing in
corresponding parts of their brains such condition as may awaken in
their minds certain associations of ideas, and manifest the peculiar
emotions which arise from them. It is not enough that we have part
of this concatenation complete; the whole must be complete, or the
results cannot be perfect. [Footnote: Some time after I had written
the above, I had the satisfaction to meet with a somewhat analogous
illustration from the pen of the late celebrated Dr John Armstrong,
which I now quote from his work on Fever, p. 418 :-
"It will have been perceived, that I consider insanity as the
effect of some disorder in the circulation, whether produced by
agencies of a corporeal or mental nature. It might be shewn by
familiar facts, that the brain is the principal organ through which
the operations of the mind are performed; and it does not, as many
have supposed, necessarily involve the doctrine of materialism to
affirm, that certain disorders of that organ are capable of disturbing
those operations. If the most skilful musician in the world were
placed before an unstrung or broken instrument, he could not produce
the harmony which he was accustomed to do when that instrument was
perfect, nay, on the contrary, the sounds would be discordant; and yet
it would be manifestly most illogical to conclude, from such an
effect, that the powers of the musician were impaired, since they
merely appeared to be so from the imperfection of the instrument. Now
what the instrument is to the musician, the brain may be to the mind,
for ought we know to the contrary; and to pursue the figure, as the
musician has an existence distinct from that of the instrument, so the
mind may have an existence distinct from that of the brain; for in
truth we have no proof whatever of mind being a property dependent
upon any arrangement of matter. We perceive, indeed, the properties of
matter wonderfully modified in the various things of the universe,
which strike our senses with the force of their sublimity or beauty;
but in all these we recognize certain radical and common properties,
that bear no conceivable relation to those mysterious capacities of
thought and of feeling, referable to that something which, to
designate and distinguish from matter, we term mind. In this way, I
conceive, the common sense of mankind has made the distinction which
every where obtains between mind and matter, for it is natural to
conclude, that the essence of mind may be distinct from the essence of
matter, as the operations of the one are so distinct from the
properties of the other. But when we say that mind is immaterial, we
only mean, that it has not the properties of matter; for the
consciousness which informs us of the operations, does not reveal the
abstract nature of mind, neither do the properties reveal the essence
of matter. When any one, therefore, asserts the materiality of mind,
he presupposes, that the phenomena of matter clearly shew the real
cause of mind, which, as they do not, he unphilosophically places his
argument on an assumption. And his ground of reasoning is equally
gratuitous, when he contends that mind is an attribute of matter,
because it is never known to operate but in conjunction with matter,
for though this connection is continually displayed, yet we have no
direct proof of its being necessary."
In like manner, Mr Herbert Mayo, in the introduction to his late
work on the Nervous System and its Functions, writes thus:- "Life
is a force so contrived and used, as to qualify the materials of the
inert world for a temporary union with consciousness, - a means how
mind may enter into such relations with matter, that it may have its
being and part in physical nature, and its faculties developed, and
its capabilities and tendencies drawn out and proved (for whatever
ulterior purpose) in subjection to, and in harmony with, her laws.
"As we imagine the Supreme Mind to be ubiquitous, infinite,
controlling, but uncontrolled by matter, so in contrast with these
attributes we conceive the finite mind to be bound down to place, and
to be dependent on a certain arrangement of matter, for its
manifestation, each power displayed as the property of a tissue, each
agency as the function of an organ.
"These views do not lead to materialism. For one cannot disjoin
the physiology of' the nervous system from mental philosophy, nor
investigate the play of its organs without attending to the mind
itself. And if equal consideration is given to the two classes of
phenomena, it is impossible (so at least it appears to myself) to
avoid the conviction, that they are essentially independent the one of
the other, and belong to distinct essences; and that ipseity, the
consciousness of personal being, is not a mode of material existence,
nor physical impenetrability an attribute of that which feels and
thinks."]
The same arguments might be enforced in respect to the painter, and
sculptor, and orator, but it appears to my mind so evident by what has
already been advanced, that I forbear extending my illustrations,
conceiving them to be unnecessary. I therefore conclude that the soul
and the brain are essentially quite distinct, and stand much in the
same relation to each other as the musician and musical instrument.
Another powerful argument of the mind being an independent essence,
is the fact, that amidst the continued changes which we know are going
on in the physical frame, we still recognize personal identity; and
the remembrance of occurrences, even of early life, after every
particle of the body has been changed several times, is reconcileable
with the idea of the original mind merely having exchanged and
renovated the substance of its dwelling - place; but how can we
suppose that each particle had, in retiring, transferred its quantum
of knowledge to the particle of matter which was to supply its place?
Colton's remark seems very just when he says, - "Many causes
are now conspiring to increase the trunk of infidelity, but
materialism is the main root of them all." I have therefore
endeavoured and I hope, by what has already been said, with some
success, to prove, that the belief in the brain being the organ of the
mind, leads only to the admission of the necessity of certain
conditions of matter, in order to make the varied conditions of mind
manifest to ourselves and other beings with which we are surrounded
during the present state of our existence. The charge against the
doctrine of phrenology, therefore; as leading to a belief in
materialism, is altogether unfounded; for phrenology merely professes
to appropriate to separate portions of the brain the execution
of special functions or manifestations, which are
generally admitted, without hesiaion, to result from its functions as
a single organ. I might therefore at once dismiss the subject, leaving
the doctrines of the existence of a God, and the immortality of the
soul, to the defence of many able writers on that department of mental
philosophy. However, as it appears to me that an argument of
considerable strength, in support of both these doctrines, may be
drawn from the doctrines of phrenology, or the allocation of special
functions to particular portions of the brain, I think it may not be
out of place for we very briefly to advert to these topics.
The concurrent notions and practices of all nations, savage as well
as civilized, clearly indicate their inward belief in a superintendent
power who rules the destinies of man and of nations, as verified by
their varied forms of worship. Phrenology, as illustrated by
Hypnotism, does more - it proves that there is a particular portion of
the brain which the mind may use as an organ destined for the especial
purpose of adoration; and, as nothing has been made in vain, or
without a final cause, we may safely infer that such an organ would
never have been made had it not been intended to be exercised; and how
could it have been exercised worthily had there been no suitable
object of adoration? The very fact, therefore, of the existence of
such a special organ having been ascertained, stamps the folly of the
Atheist; and, as we have proved that mind is not necessarily a mere
attribute of organized matter, but a distinct essence, we cannot
suppose it to be more perishable than matter; and as it is an
acknowledged fact, that matter, so far as we can apprehend, is
essentially indestructible, analogy would lead us to infer, that the
mind, the more important part of man, will not be less imperishable;
and, consequently, the most rational conclusion to which we can arrive
is, that the soul is immortal.
"There is mind, then, as well as matter, or rather, if there be
a difference of the degrees of evidence, there is mind, more surely
than there is matter; and if at death not a single atom of the body
perishes, but that which we term dissolution, decay, putrefaction, is
only a change of the relative positions of those atoms, which in
themselves continue to exist with all the qualities which they before
possessed, there is surely no reason, from this mere change of place
of the atoms that formed the body to infer, with respect to the
independent mind, any other change than that of its mere relation to
those separate atoms. The continued subsistence of every thing
corporeal cannot, at least, be regarded as indicative of the
annihilation of the other substance, but must, on the contrary, as far
as the mere analogy of the body is of any weight, be regarded as a
presumption in favour of the continued subsistence of the mind, when
there is nothing around it which has perished, and nothing even which
has perished, in the whole material universe, since the universe
itself was called into being." Dr Thomas Brown.
"The mind remembers, conceives, combines, and reasons; it
loves, it fears, and hopes in the total absence of any impression from
without, that can influence, in the smallest degree, these emotions;
and we have the fullest conviction that it would continue to exercise
the same functions in undiminished activity, though all material
things were at once annihilated." - Abercrombie.
Mr Stewart also says, "Of all the truths we know the existence
of mind is the most certain. Even the system of Berkeley concerning
the non-existence of matter, is far mote conceivable, than that
nothing but matter exists in the universe."
Plato also wrote thus:- "The body being compounded, is
dissolved by death; the soul, being simple, passeth into another life,
incapable of corruption"
That accomplished physician and metaphysician, Dr Abercrombie, after
relating the effects on memory of diseases and disorders of the brain,
with, in many instances, serious organic lesion, concludes thus; "One
thing, however, is certain, that they give no countenance to the
doctrine of materialism, which some have presumptuously deduced from a
very partial view of the influence of cerebral disease upon the
manifestations of mind. They shew us, indeed, in a very striking
manner, the mind holding intercourse with the external world through
the medium of the brain and nervous system; and, by certain diseases
of these organs, they shew this intercourse impaired or suspended; but
they shew nothing more. In particular, they warrant nothing in any
degree analogous to those partial deductions which form the basis of
materialism. On the contrary, they shew us the brain injured and
diseased to an extraordinary extent, without the mental functions
being affected in any sensible degree." (This power no doubt
arises from each hemisphere having corresponding organs, and
consequently when only one is diseased, the other may be
adequate to the manifestaion of the mental phenomena.) "They shew
us farther, the manifestations of mind obscured for a time, and yet
reviving in all their original vigour almost in the very moment of
dissolution. Finally, their exhibit to us the mind, cut off from all
intercourse with the external world, recalling its old impressions,
even of things long forgotten, and exercising its powers on those
which had long ceased to exist, in a manner totally irreconcilable
with any idea we can form of a material function." On the
Intellectual Powers, pp. 154, 155.
In addition to what I have already advanced in refutaion of the
doctrine of materialism, I beg to submit what appears to me much more
probable than that mental manifestations are the result of mere
organism, - namely, that organism is the result of mind, or the
principle of life influencing or directing organism in accordance with
what may be its especial wants and desires. We know that every seed of
a plant has a principle of life imparted to it by the great first
cause of all, by which, when sown in congenial soil, it will exert its
powers, and appropriate to itself materials from the soil, to form an
organism in accordance with its peculiar wants and nature; and that,
having passed through certain conditions, and formed other kindred
seed or germs to propagate its kind under a return of favouring
circumstances, the plant dies, and is resolved into its original
elements, Man and animals also possess similar faculties for
propagating and multiplying their species; and to me it appears far
more probable, that the peculiar organism. of each variety results
from the vivifying or intelligent principle we call life or mind (and
no one denies the existence of the former, although we know nothing of
its essence or mode of operation,) directing and determining
appropriate formation, than that the mere accidental union of
particles of matter, in definite quantity and form, should be the cause
of mental phenomena [Footnote: The original identity of structure of
the germ of the most various organic beings, constituted, as it always
is, of a cell, with a nucleus, seems to prove, that the cause of the
variety of classes, families, genera, and species of animals and
plants developed from the germ, resides not in the structure or
chemical property of the germ, but in the idea or spirit. implanted in
it at its creation." (Müller, p. 1339.).] It is true
we can here only speak of analogies, but the analogy in favour of this
proposition seems far more natural and probable than the other. Is it
not, for example, a priori, as probable, on viewing a well
planned factory, fitted up with what is called self-acting machinery,
for us to suppose that the whole should have been planned, and the
machinery constructed, in accordance with the intelligent designs of a
skilful artist, as that the brute matter, of which the whole is
constructed, came into its particular forms and arrangements of its
own accord, or by accident, and thus produced the intelligence of the
superintending possessor? The higher and more perfect the original
force, or life, or spirit, originally imparted into each species, the
more complex and extensive should we expect to find the corresponding
organism, to adapt it for the suitable performance of its more varied
functions; and it therefore was necessary for man to have that
superiority, even in the form and functions of his hands, in which he
so much surpasses that of all other animals, to fit him for the
execution of the more extended range of operations, which his superior
endowments and cerebral organism fitted him to devise.
In this view of the subject, (and it appears to me, after consulting
the various opinions of our ablest authorities on life and
organization, to be the most satisfactory conclusion I could arrive
at,) every plant or animal, however minute, may have a particular
vital or directing principle originally imparted to it, and still
sustained in its power by the great Creator, without the necessity of
according to each an immortal existence and responsibility. Nor is
there any thing irreconcilable in the supposition that man, with
higher original powers, and more perfect organism, fitting him to use
these appropriately, and who is the highest link in the chain, in this
world, between inorganic matter and the Supreme Being, should be
constituted a responsible agent, and exist hereafter, whilst those
creatures with less expansive faculties, both of life and
organization, may be exempted from such ultimate responsibility, and
may not be immortal.
This is only analogous to what we see in respect to a commanding
officer and his men, the former only being responsible for
imprudent enterprises, the latter being considered merely as
instruments in his hands.
I shall close these remarks on the immortality of the soul by a
quotation from that excellent work, "Abererombie on the
Intellectual Powers." "This momentous truth rests on a
species of evidence altogether different, which addresses itself to
the moral constitution of man. It is found in those principles of his
nature by which he feels upon his spirit the awe of a God, and looks
forward to the future with anxiety or with hope, - by which he knows
to distinguish truth from falsehood, and evil from good, and has
forced upon him the conviction that he is a moral and responsible
being. This is the power of conscience, that monitor within, which
raises its voice in the breast of every man, a witness for his
Creator. He who resigns himself to its guidance, and he who repels its
warnings, are both compelled to acknowledge its power; and whether the
good man rejoices in the prospect of immortality, or the victim of
remorse withers beneath an influence unseen by human eye, and shrinks
from the anticipation of a reckoning to come, each has forced upon him
a conviction, such as argument never gave, that the being which is
essentially himself is distinct from any function of the body, and
will survive in undiminished vigour when the body shall have fallen
into decay.
"There is thus, in the consciousness of every man, a deep
impression of continued existence. The casuist may reason against it
till he bewilder himself in his own sophistries; but a voice within
gives the lie to his vain speculations, and pleads with authority for
a life which is to come. The sincere and humble inquirer cherishes the
impression, while be seeks for farther light on a subject so
momentous, and he thus receives, with absolute conviction, the truth
which beams upon him from the revelation of God, that the mysterious
part of his being, which thinks, and wills, and reasons, shall indeed
survive the wreck of its mortal tenement, and is destined for
immortality." [Footnote: To those who wish to pursue the subject
farther, I beg to refer to Dr Samuel Clarke on the Being and
Attributes of God, pp. 70-15; Jackson on Matter and Mind, pp. 41-47,
51; Warburton's Divine Legation, vol. I, book 3d; Drew's Essay on the
Immortality of the Soul; and Ramsay's Principles, pp. 233-5; also
Brougham and Bakewell, where they will find it ably argued as far as
Natural Theology can avail; but the sacred volume contains a lucidity
and sanction beyond all we can adduce from mere human ingenuity, and I
therefore conclude by referring to it, as "life and immortality
are clearly brought to light through the Gospel."]
It must be obvious to all, that every variety of passion and emotion
can be excited in the mind by music; but how does this arise? Simply
by the different effects produced by the varied degrees of velocity,
force, quality, and combinations of the oscillations of the air acting
on the auditory nerves, these again communicated to the brain, and
this acting on the mind and body, creating corresponding mental and
bodily manifestations. Every one must have observed the remarkable
effects evinced by these means on the physiognomy, and the more
critically observant must have noticed, that in susceptible
individuals there is also a very marked change in the state of the
respiration and general posture of the body. They must also have
experienced, in themselves and others, how prone we are to assume a
sympathetic condition, both of mind and body, from those with whom we
associate, or during a temporary interview. These physical changes
seem to result from a mental influence imparted through the eyes and
ears, and then reflected from within, through the respiratory, facial,
and spinal nerves, on the external form and features. Now such being
the case, is there any great improbability, that by calling the
muscles of expression into action during the hypnotic state, by
titillating certain nerves, that the impression of the feeling with
which such external manifestation is generally associated should be
reflected on the brain, and excite in the mind the particular passion
or emotion? I think it is highly probable this is the true cause of
the phrenological manifestations during the hypnotic condition; and as
it is the peculiar feature of this condition, that the whole energies
of the soul should be concentrated on the emotion excited, the
manifestation, of course, becomes very decided. I presume the
different points pressed on, through the stimulus given to various
fasciculi of nerves, call into action certain combinations of muscles
of expression in the face and general frame, and also influence the
organs of respiration, and thus the mind is influenced, indirectly,
through the organs of common sensation and the sympathetic, as
sneezing is excited in some by too strong a light irritating the optic
nerves. Two patients who are highly intelligent, and remain partially
conscious, and who acknowledge they did all in their power to resist
the influence excited by manipulating the head, state, that the first
feeling was a drawing of the muscles of the face, and affection of the
breathing, which was followed by an irresistible impulse to act as
they did, but why they could not tell.
In this view of the subject it would resolve itself into the laws of
sympathy, and the question then is, where are the external or
superficial points of the sympathies located? Experience must decide
this, and in the peculiar condition induced by hypnotism, according to
my own experience, this can be more readily and certainly determined
than in the normal state. These points having been ascertained, we can
then determine how and where to act according to our particular
object; and it can be of no real importance where the cerebral points
or special organs may be posited.
As to the real locations of the sympathetic points, by stimulating
which we produce peculiar manifestations, they appear to me not to be
quite accurately the same in all heads, but, on the whole, pretty near
the centres of the organs as mapped out on heads generally approved by
phrenologists, and I have had decided proof that there is some
relation subsists betwixt the size and function, as in general there
is more energy displayed when there is large development, and the
negative when it is defective. Thus, a patient with large
combativeness or destructiveness, when excited during hypnotism, will
display great violence and disposition to attack others, whereas,
where they are defective, they will shrink and express a fear that
some one is. quarrelling, or angry with them.
If the solution of the cause of these remarkable phenomena now given
should not be deemed correct, the only other which occurs to my mind
as at all satisfactory, is this, that the different fasciculi of
sentient nerves excite directly the corresponding points
of the brain, and these again the physical manifestations. We know by
what musical combinations and movements we can excite the different
passions; we know also that this arises from some peculiar impression
communicated to the brain through the portio mollis of the seventh
pair of nerves; and whether this is conveyed to it as a single organ
only, or as a combination of organs, it is clear that, as the origin
of the seventh is more remote from the brain than the
origin of the fifth, there must, consequently, be at least as
great difficulty in accounting for such results being excited through
the different branches of the seventh as through those of the
fifth pair.
The animal magnetizers do not now contend for their volitions
being necessary. Dr Elliotson distinctly states, in a published
letter, dated llth September, 1842, that he had "Never produced
any effect by mere willing;" and adds, "I have never seen
reason to believe, (and I have made innumerable comparative
experiments upon the point,) that I have heightened the effect of my
processes by exerting the strongest will, or lessened them by thinking
intentionally of other things, and endeavouring to bestow no more
attention upon what I was about than was just necessary to carry on
the process. So far from willing, I have at first had no idea of what
would be the effect of my processes; in exciting the cerebral
organs, the effect ensues as well in my female patient though the
manipulator be a sceptic, and may therefore be presumed not to wish
the proper result to ensue and though I stood aside, and do not know
what organ he has in view. I have never excited them by the mere will;
I have excited them with my fingers just as well when thinking of
other matters with my friends, and momentarily forgetting what I was
about," &c. The Doctor also denies his belief in the
phrenological results arising from sympathy with the state of the
operator's brain. I feel convinced that he is right in these
sentiments, and believe that the same degree of mechanical pressure or
stimulus to the integuments of the cranium, from an inanimate
substance, when the patient is in the proper stage of the mesmeric
condition, will produce the same manifestation as the personal touch
of either sceptic or believer in animal magnetism. Thus, touching them
with a knobbed glass rod, three feet long, has produced the phenomena
with my patients as certainly as personal contact, so that if there is
any thing of vital magnetism in it, it is subject to different
laws from that of ordinary magnetism or electricity.
Mere pointing I have myself found sufficient to excite the
manifestations in several patients, after previous excitement of the
organs, but this arises from feeling, as I know the sensibility of the
skin in those cases enables them to feel without actual contact.
The following experiment seems to me to prove clearly that the
manifestations were entirely attributable to the mechanical pressure
operating on an excited state of the nervous system. I placed a cork
endways over the organ of veneration, and bound it in that position by
a bandage passing under the chin. I now hypnotized the patient, and
observed the effect, which was precisely the same, for some time, as
when no such appliance was used; after a minute and a half had
elapsed, an altered expression of countenance took place, and a
movement of the arms and hands, which latter became clasped as in
adoration, and the patient now arose from the seat and knelt down as
if engaged in prayer. On moving the cork forwards, active benevolence
was manifested, and on being pushed back, veneration again manifested
itself. I have repeatedly tried similar experiments with this, and
other patients, with the like results, including other organs. It is
clear there was no mechanical pressure to direct the movement downwards,
because there was pressure upwards also and had there been any
preconceived notion in the patient's mind; to excite to such action,
it ought to have been manifested immediately on passing into the
sleep. None of the patients had the slightest notion of what was
my object in making such experiments, and none of them saw the others
operated on. At page 141, it will be observed, pressure by their own
fingers produced similar manifestations, Eden whilst their minds were
expecting some other results.
Whilst it is generally agreed that the brain admits of being divided
into regions for the animal propensities, moral sentiments, and
intellectual faculties, it has not been at all possible to prove
satisfactorily the exact position and size of each organ, as noted by
the phrenologists. Granting that there is a distinct organ or point in
the brain for each faculty, which I think is highly probable, still
there must ever be insuperable difficulty in thus accurately
determining character, even supposing we knew the exact position and
size of each organ, because much must depend upon the state of
perfection of structure, and activity of the point or organ, as well
as its absolute size. Thus, a person with a large eye may have
defective sight, whilst a person with a small eye may see clearly and
distinctly, the greater perfection of structure, and activity of the
optic nerves, more than compensating for mere deficiency of size. So
it is with the brain, a part may be abnormally large, and the faculty
dull, from want of power or activity, or perfection of organic
structure; and the reverse may obtain, a small development, with high
activity, may render its function predominant. It is from a want of
such knowledge as this that phrenology must ever prove imperfect, even
granting the localities to be correctly ascertained and established.
However, when we have ascertained the points where, by acting in any
peculiar manner, we can excite into activity particular sympathetic
physical and mental associations, whilst the other faculties
are put into a state of quiescence, it appears to me to be a matter of
far greater importance, and a subject still more curious, than any
thing ever brought forward by phrenologists. It is far more available
for practical purposes too. Phrenologists could at best only pretend
to tell the natural tendencies of an individual, and direct
that he should be educated in accordance with a specific plan, as has
hitherto been done independently of phrenology, from watching the
natural dispositions and habits of different individuals, by
encouraging and directing their studies in such and such a direction;
but here, in addition to this, we have the power of giving a
decided impulse in any particular direction. It ought not to be
overlooked, that this does not deprive us of any of our former
available modes of instruction and morality, but it promises to prove
a powerful auxiliary for expediting and ensuring the success of those
means. It therefore follows, that it becomes the duty of every
well-wisher to his species to investigate this matter, and determine
how far it is generally applicable. It is still more the duty
of the medical faculty to do so, because, should farther experience
determine this question in the affirmative, it is reasonable to expect
it may be turned to the best account in the cure of disease, by
applying out remedies locally, to the cutaneous points which
have been ascertained to be the centres of the morbid concatenation.
Thus, leeching and sedatives, &c. might be applied to such points
when there was excitement of the corresponding functions, and vice
versa, with the reasonable hope of success; and if this method
cannot be effective, we can be pretty certain of success through
hypnotism, by exciting the morbidly low faculty where there is
depression, and the antagonist organ where there has been excitement.
In this manner I have no doubt but hypnotism may prove of incalculable
advantage in the treatment of many cases of insanity, and nervous
affections tending to induce that disease.
I am quite aware some will be ready to start an objection to my
views, by stating that the scalp, where many or most of these
demonstrations have been manifested, is not highly sensitive, that it
is not extensively supplied with sensient nerves, and that they all
arise from the fifth pair, and do not pass directly through the skull
to the subjacent points of the brain. This, however, does not prove
that the terminal branches may not ultimately have a special influence
on such points, notwithstanding their circuitous course to arrive
there. I beg to remind such individuals that we are by no means
sufficiently acquainted with the laws and distribution of the nervous
system, to be able to prescribe rules as to how it ought
and must act. Who does not know, that until the discoveries of
out illustrious countryman, Sir Charles Bell, the same nerve was
considered to give both sense and motion? And when he propounded that
the true cause of its double functions was because of its having double
roots, as not this announcement scouted for some time, and then, when
proved to be true, were not attempts made to rob Sir Charles Bell of
the honour of the discovery?
There seems to be great reason to conclude that the distribution of
the nerves of the scalp will ultimately be found far more intricate
and beautifully arranged than at present we have any conception of.
I shall now proceed to state my views as to the mode in which
different parts of the brain are associated with different parts of
the body. I have long quite agreed with those physiologists who
consider that the vis nervosa is something circulated in
tubes, that the primitive nerve-tubes do not anastomose, but only run
parallel with others, remaining distinct and isolated throughout their
course, and that consequently the "cerebral extremity of each
fibre is connected with the peripheral extremity of a single nervous
fibre only, and that this peripheral extremity is in relation with
only one point of the brain or spinal cord: so that, corresponding to
the many millions of primitive fibres which are given off to
peripheral parts of the body, there are the same number of peripheral
points of the body represented on the brain. The sensation of a single
point evidently depends on the impression being conveyed by means of a
single fibre to a single point of the sensorium." (Müller.)
It is from the same cause that we can regulate simple or associated
movements of distinct members.
From all these considerations it appears quite reasonably to
suppose, and analogy, as respects distinct organs being appropriated
for other special functions, warrants the inference, that different
parts of the brain may have special functions to perform, both as
regards mind and matter; and that, when such points are excited into
inordinate activity, the manifestations will become correspondingly
more conspicuous and vice versa.
We know from experience that the various passions and emotions can
be excited through the organ of hearing either by music or oratory,
through the eyes by painting or sculpture, and likewise, though less
extensively and efficiently, through common sensation, and there seems
to me to be nothing, a priori to militate against the
probability, that this may be effected to a much greater extent than
has yet been done, provided we can only discover the peculiar mode of
exciting certain portions of the brain. If the views already advanced,
that every [point of the body supplied by primitive nervous fibres has
a distinct corresponding point in the brain, it is clear, that by
titillating each peripheral point, we shall excite its corresponding
central point; and from what shall be found detailed in experiments
recorded, it appears highly probable that the respective parts of the
brain corresponding to every part of the body, may be excited
into activity though certain sympathetic points in the integuments of
the head and neck, and if so, we may also excite into activity the
whole of those actions, mental and muscular, which are associated with
each portion of the cerebrum. In this case Smellie's supposition would
be completely realized in man. he expresses himself thus:- "I can
conceive a superior being so thoroughly acquainted with the human
frame, so perfectly skilled in the connection and mutual dependence
which subsist between our intellect and our sensitive organs, as to be
able, by titillating in various modes and directions, particular
combinations of nerves, or particular branches of any single nerve, to
excite in the mind what idea he may think proper. I can likewise
conceive the possibility of suggesting any particular idea, or species
of ideas, by affecting the nerves in the same manner as these ideas
affect them when excited by any other cause." This confident
aspiration seems to be now in a great measure realized, by certain
modes of manipulating patients during the hypnotic condition, of which
I shall now adduce a few illustrations.
My first attempt to excite the phreno-hypnotic phenomena was in the
month of April, 1842, in the lecture-room at Liverpool, but it did not
succeed. I then tried the experiment repeatedly in private, putting
the patients to sleep by contact as well as in my usual way, but still
could not succeed. I was anxious to try it fairly, and therefore
applied to Mr Brookes, through the kindness of Dr Birt Davies of
Birmingham, for information as to the mode Mr Brookes had practised so
successfully, and which was most politely communicated to me by both
these gentlemen. I tried this mode with several patients, both in my
usual plan and that of the animal magnetisers, but was still
unsuccessful. I now abandoned it as a hopeless task, presuming the
cases which had proved successful with others must have been lusus
naturae, or that the operators had deceived themselves, the
patients having been led to answer, and give the manifestations they
did, from the nature of the leading questions proposed, and might
afterwards remember what passed at previous operations, and answer
accordingly; whilst, like natural somnambulists, they might not
remember, when awake, what had passed during their sleep.
Last December I was induced to make another attempt, from reading a
report of Mr Spencer T. Hall's two first lectures on the subject, at
Sheffield: and it was remarkable, that the very first patient I tried
in that way exhibited several of the manifestations. However, I was
led to refer the result to a totally different cause from what he and
the other animal magnetisers did. I concluded it arose from the
different degrees of sensibility of different parts of the
integuments, conveying correspondingly varied impressions when
similarly impressed, and exciting different ideas in the mind, and
thus calling up ld associations; and that when similarly impressed the
same ideas might again present themselves to the mind. I considered
this far more probable than that the brain was affected by any
transmission from the operator to the brain directly through the
skull; and to prove this, tried the effect of pressure over parts
which had no cerebral substance directly subjacent, and the
results confirmed my expectations. Thus, pressure on the apex of the
mastoid process, and the ossa nasi, and the chin
were as certainly followed by particular manifestations, as pressure
on different parts of the cranium were followed by others. I also very
soon ascertained that the same points of the cranium, when thus
excited, did not excite the same ideas or emotions to the
minds of different patients, which I considered ought to have
been the case, according to the views of the staunch phrenologists. I
have since discovered the cause of this, namely, not having
operated at the proper stage of the hypnotic condition.
I shall now adduce a few examples. On one subject, after being in
the hypnotic condition for a few minutes, by applying gentle pressure
over the ossa nasi, immoderate laughter was immediately
excited, and ceased as abruptly on removing the contact. The
abruptness of these transitions, especially from immoderate laughter
to the extreme gravity and vacancy of expression peculiar to the
hypnotic state, was quite ludicrous, and almost beyond belief.
Supposing she were singing the most grave tune and solemn words, the
moment the nose was touched in this manner, by any one, she was
irresistibly thrown into this merry mood, but would join in the tune
again with the utmost gravity the moment the contact ceased. Rubbing
the same part, or pinching up the skin over it, seemed to produce no
effect whatever. On applying pressure to this patient's chin there was
an immediate catch in he breathing, with sighing and sobbing, which
would subside on removing the point of contact. By touching both nose
and chin at same time there was the most ludicrous combination of
laughing and crying, each struggling for the mastery, as we sometimes
see in hysteric attacks. Both would cease immediately on removing the
contact. Friction or pinching the skin on the chin had no effect of
producing such phenomena, in short, no part of this patient which I
tested seemed capable of being excited by friction or pinching the
integuments, excepting around the orbits, which produced spectra,
although less perfectly so than by simple pressure
against the bone. This patient, being always pressed over the
phrenologists' organ of time, always expressed her desire "to
write" - a letter - to her mother or her brother; over their
organ of tune, "to sing"; between this and wit, "to be
judicious"; the boundary between wit and causality, "to be
clever"; causality, "to have knowledge"; in the centre
of the forehead, to have "a certain perception of learning";
below this the phrenologists' eventuality, "to be skilful";
the points of the head occupied by veneration and benevolence were
sometimes indicated by the desire "to be virtuous," or "to
be honourable"; most frequently, when the point touched was over
benevolence, the answer was, "to be honourable," and when
over the other point, "to be virtuous," when both points
were touched at same time, it was, " to be honourable and
virtuous," and the same answer was always given when these points
were touched combined with No. 1, or amativeness. When the
latter was touched alone, the answer always was "to be commended;"
when approximating the mastoid process, or over that process, a
remarkable placidity, or expression of delight, came over the
countenance, and the desire was for "complacency," which,
when hypnotized, she defined, " to be civil,"' but when
awake she seemed at a loss to know what the word meant On touching "combativeness"
the placidity of countenance was speedily exchanged for the opposite
expression; but on pressure being made immediately above the ears, the
most ferocious aspect of countenance was assumed, the breath being
suppressed almost to suffocation, the face becoming flushed, with
grinding of the teeth; and when the arms were not rigid, the most
vigorous efforts at inflicting violence on all who were within her
reach, as several gentlemen can attest to their personal knowledge and
sorrow. On pressure being applied to the root of the nose, the idea of
seeing different forms, and figures, and colours, seemed to be excited
in the mind, more vividly when certain points were thus excited, but
it could be excited by pressing the integuments against the under,
as well as upper edge of the orbit, with this difference, that
the objects seen, or rather spectra excited, were then generally of a
painful and distressing character, whereas they were generally of a
bright, and glowing, or cheerful description when excited by acting on
the upper margin of the orbit. I should observe, that care was
taken, in all these experiments, not to press against the globe of
the eye. Thus far the phenomena were pretty uniform in this
patient, the answers having been generally very much the same when
impressed exactly in the same way, on the same points, anal under
similar circumstances in all other respects. Thus, the last day I
had all opportunity of testing this patient, I went over the different
points four times with scarcely the slightest variation in the
answers, as can be testified by several gentlemen who were present;
and they were again repeated two or three times the same evening with
like results. This patient was operated on the previous day in
presence of several professional and scientific gentlemen, when
several answers were given different. More than one being operating on
that occasion, and the manner and degree of touching the parts being
different, might be the cause of the varied results. I am satisfied
this patient knew nothing of phrenology; and that she remembered
nothing of what she said, or was done to her during these operations.
Case II. In this patient friction would excite,
whilst pressure had no effect in calling forth manifestations.
In this case, friction over the ossa nasi excited the desire
for "something to smell," generally aromatic vinegar or Eau
de Cologne; over the chin, for something to eat; over the tendon of
orbicularis, a tendency to laugh; close upon the root of the nose,
friction excited spectra, and around the orbit, in like manner, the
same or different spectra, differing to the degrees of pressure
and friction applied; over the organ of tune, "to sing";
over the back part of the base of the head, expressed herself "very
happy and comfortable"; over combativeness and destructiveness, a
quarrelsome disposition, as manifested in word, look, and action. The
other parts tried were less certain or decided in this patient.
Case III. In this patient, friction excited the desire "to
waltz", when applied over the organ of tune, and the desire "to
walk", when applied to the organ of wit, as mapped by the
phrenologists, and in like manner, "to sing" when veneration
was the point affected. Spectra, also, when the integuments were
rubbed against the margin of the orbits. Although not corresponding
with the phrenological charts, nor with what occurred in the others,
similar answers were given when the same points were similarly
excited.
Case IV. When asked what she would like, when manipulated as the
others referred to, almost always answered, "nothing at all",
excepting over the most sensitive parts of the cranium, when her
answer was, "leeches to my head".
Case V. Very much the same as the last.
I think the cases referred to support my position, that the
different results arise from the circumstance of different parts of
the integuments having different degrees of sensibility, and thus
exciting different ideas in the mind when the same quality and
intensity of stimulus is applied to each part in succession. There can
be no doubt but the point under which the phrenologists have posited "combativeness
and destructiveness", is the most highly sensitive of any part of
the cranium, and is always accompanied with symptoms of the patients
feeling pain, and, as a matter of course, they will offer resistance,
and attempt to free themselves from the offending cause; and so of the
rest, according to their respective impressibilities.
After the above remarks had been written, and my work set to the
press, I met with the following most interesting case:- I was informed
that a child, five years and a half old, who had been present when I
exhibited experiments No. I the same evening had proposed to operate
on her nurse. The nurse had no objection to indulge the girl, never
supposing any effect could take place. However, it appeared she
speedily closed her eyes, when the child, imitating what she saw me
do, placed a finger on her forehead, and asked what she would like,
when the patient answered, "to dance"; on trying another
point, the answer was, "to sing", and the two then had a
song together, after which the juvenile experimenter roused the
patient in the same manner she had seen me do.
The above circumstance being related to me the following day, I felt
curious to ascertain whether there might not be some mistake, as there
had been no third party present, and it depended entirely on the
statement of the child, which induced me, when visiting the family the
day after, to request permission to test the patient. This was readily
granted; and, to my astonishment, she manifested the phenomena in a
degree far beyond any case I had tried; indeed, she did so, with a
degree of perfection which baffles description.
however frequently she was tried, the same expression of
countenance, the same condition of the respiration, and similar
postures of the body have been evinced, when the same points were
pressed. Indeed, so highly susceptible was she, that, after a few
trials, when I pointed a finger or glass rod over the part, without
contact, similar manifestations resulted, only in a less rapid and
more modified degree. I also found by trying No. !! at an earlier
stage, that he susceptibility was almost equal to the present
case. The following are a few of the more striking manifestations:
pressure on the chin was followed by movement of the jaws, lips, and
tongue, with the desire to eat; on the lower part of the nose, "to
smell"; insertion of tendon of the orbicularis, immoderate
laughter, which, on being asked why she laughed, the answer indicated,
it was from a sense of the ludicrousness being excited; over time, "to
dance"; tune, "to sing", with pressure on the eye at
the same time, she did sing part of a song; over the back of the head,
No. I she shuddered and retreated, under the impression that some one
was about to take liberties with her, the same feeling of delicacy was
also manifested when any other part of the body was touched
excepting the head and face; over apex of mastoid process, the
desire to shake hands and be friendly; the former, with No. 4, or
adhesiveness, she would lean to, or clasp any one near her;
combativeness, the reverse; destructiveness, (it was very small,) she
was distressed from the notion that some one was quarrelling with
her; philoprogenitiveness, she always said, "hark, the poor
child is crying!" secretiveness and caution, she would tell
nothing; benevolence, "to travel"; veneration, she knelt
down in the most solemn manner and prayed; combined with hope and
expression of ecstasy united with devotion; over the eyebrows, spectra
of all forms and colours, gay and glowing, and when below the eye, the
notion of the sea, a ship, and people about to be drowned; at a
farther trial, other manifestations come out equally, or even more
strikingly, according to the accuracy with which the corresponding
points were touched. In particular, I must note what happened the
first time I touched imitation, which was entirely accidental, and
whilst, besides a relation of my own, there was present a gentleman
whose literary and scientific attainments, and philosophic turn of
mind, as well as high standing in society, render him an ornament of
our country. beside imitating everything done or said in English, she
imitated correctly French, Italian, Spanish, German, Lain and Greek;
every word was spoken with the utmost precision, and has been done
several times since before many professional and scientific gentlemen,
and ladies, who can bear testimony to the extraordinary fidelity of
pronunciation and emphasis. I need scarcely add, she could not do so
when tested after being awakened. Many other patients I have since
made do the same, one a girl of only twelve years of age.
On Mr Hall's arrival in Manchester, previous to his first lecture, I
had the pleasure of seeing him at my house, when I exhibited my
experiments on his and another patient, with which he seemed much
gratified. I also afforded him an opportunity of seeing them again
next day. After I had them in the hypnotic condition, I requested him
to manipulate their heads, which he did more minutely than I had done,
and consequently brought out additional manifestations. I was on the
alert to all he did and said, for I was determined he should not have
an opportunity of prompting in any way, and most assuredly, by
exciting acquisitiveness, he very soon led the patient to steal a
silver snuff-BookNeurypnology.html from a gentleman present, and it was most striking
the anxiety with which she returned it, on Mr Hall removing the point
of contact to conscientiousness, - the movement of the arm was changed
instantly, as if automatically.
I had never tried to excite either of these two points. The other
manifestations, which I had previously seen developed, were previously
seen developed, were precisely the same under his manipulations as my
own. I made several attempts to excite the organ of benevolence, but
without effect, until one day I accidentally placed my finger so low
as I should have considered to be the middle of comparison, as marked
on the busts, when she instantly evinced the emotion in the most
active manner, saying, "poor creature, poor creature", and
not content, as many are, with mere words of compassion, she
anxiously presented us with all the money in her pocket. I should not
omit to add, that this patient is quite unconscious of all she
or others do or say whilst in this state, and did not know the
location of a single organ.
It would only be an unnecessary waste of time to detail at length
all the cases I have had since of similar manifestations, varying in
degree according to the original constitution and habit of mind of
each patient. the variety is the most striking proof of the reality of
the phenomena. There are some patients who have a sort of indistinct
recollection of what had passed, as if it had been a dream; two in
particular, who observed they had an indistinct notion of what they
were doing, but felt irresistibly impelled, as it were, to do certain
things, even whilst they thought complying with the predominant
inclination would make them very ridiculous. This, I presume, referred
to imitation and comicality, and such like humorous faculties, which
they displayed in a very remarkable degree. these patients are highly
respectable and intelligent, and manifested the phenomena quite as
prominently as the patient last named, that of veneration and hope,
also filial affection, in a manner baffling description. Each knew
only one phrenological system.
That I might be the better certified that all was reality, I also
got a relation of my own to submit to the operation, and it was quite
conclusive. She has a slight recollection of some things which
were said and done, but of other seems quite oblivious.
I had also the opportunity of verifying the truthfulness of these
various and interesting phenomena through the kindness of Mrs. Colonel
---------, who submitted to be operated on by me in the presence of
her husband, as also the Major; the Captain and Surgeon of the
regiment; also a high dignitary of the church, and who is also an
eminently scientific gentleman; Mr Gardom, surgeon, and other
professional gentlemen; Mr Aspinal Turner, and a number of others,
both ladies and gentlemen. In about three minutes after she was
asleep, I placed two fingers over the point named veneration,
instantly the aspect of he countenance changed; in a little slowly,
and solemnly, and majestically arose from her chair, advanced towards
the table in the middle of the room, and softly sank on her knees, and
exhibited such a picture of devout adoration as can never be forgotten
by any who had the gratification to witness it. She was tested with a
number of other faculties, when the corresponding manifestations were
equally striking and characteristic. When awakened, this lady was
quite unconscious of all which had happened.
Here, then, we have the testimony of a lady of the highest
respectability and intelligence, and energy of mind, corroborating,
both in word and action, and look, the reality of the phenomena as
exhibited by others, and that in the presence of most respectable and
intelligent witnesses, who can bear testimony that there was nothing
said or done to direct her in the important manifestations. This lady
had been hypnotized by me once before, for a few minutes, at a private
conversazione the week before, when she sat down fully convinced she
could NOT be affected, but was soon made to acknowledge the power of
hypnotism, and now she was a valuable evidence to the more novel
investigation as to how far phrenological manifestations could be
developed during hypnotism. [Footnote: A report having been
circulated, no doubt with the view of neutralizing the interest
attaching to the case, that this lady was a phrenologist, I called to
inquire whether there was any ground for such a report. Mrs. S.
herself assured me it was quite erroneous, for it was a subject she
had never paid any attention to, and one she was quite ignorant of.
Wishing to be very circumstantially correct in the statement, she
added, "I have understood the organ of music is somewhere about
the forehead;" when requested to place her finger on the organ ,
she was quite wrong, so that she did not know a single organ.
I mentioned this circumstance, in her presence, at another
conversazione, when she most distinctly declared the facts here
recorded, to be strictly correct.] I have now realized these phenomena
very prominently with forty-five patients, most of whom, I am quite
certain, knew nothing of phrenology, some of them not even what the
word meant; and the smallness of the points to which the contact must
be made to elicit the manifestations correctly, especially the
subdivisions by Mr. Hall, is such as to render collusion most
improbable. I was also careful to avoid prompting, by putting leading
questions. I have also succeeded partially with others; and several of
my friends have also been successful with. a few other eases.
I attended Mr Hall's public lectures, and the very first experiment
he tried, February 24, 1843, convinced me, that the reason why I had
not sooner obtained the manifestations more generally was, because I
had allowed my patients to pass into the supersentient state
before testing them. I was aware of the difference in the state of the
circulation through the brain in the state in which my patients were,
and what it must be in the state in which his were during his
operations, and conjectured, that by trying my patients in that
condition, I might get manifestations which I had failed to do at
former trails; and the very first cases I tried; proved this
conjecture to be correct. For example, No. II. already referred to,
exhibited a number of additional phenomena beautifully; and cases IV.
and V. in like manner, came out beautifully. From this single
observation on Mr Hall's mode, or rather time, of operating, I
have been enabled to arrive at a mode of operating which, I believe,
by putting patients into the hypnotic condition my own way, there will
be no great difficulty in manifesting some of the phenomena in most
cases. There are some patients, however, who will evince them much
more prominently that others, and the power of habit seems evident in
most, being more readily operated on after a few trials. Some,
however, seem as perfect as possible at the first trial.
I have also tried several private friends, on whose intelligence,
honour, and integrity, I could rely, and also children, and have found
the evidence so satisfactory, that I am quite certain as to the
reality of the phenomena; but s to my theoretical views, I wish them
to be considered as mere conjectures, thrown out for the purpose of
exciting others to think, and investigate this curious and most
important subject.
I shall conclude this article by calling attention of my readers to
the coincidence which appears to subsist betwixt the phenomena now
referred to, and the mode of exciting dreaming, in some patients, by
whispering in their ears. I shall illustrate that by reference to a
case recorded in one of Dr Abercrombie's valuable works, on the
authority of the late Dr Gregory. It is that of the case of an officer
in the expedition to Louisburgh in 1758. His brother officers were in
the habit of amusing themselves at his expense. They could produce any
kind of dream they chose, especially if done by one which whose voice
he was familiar. Thus, at one time, they conducted him through the
whole process of a quarrel, ending in a duel; and when it was supposed
the parties met, a pistol was put in his hand, which he fired, and was
awakened by its report. ON another occasion, being asleep in the
locker of the cabin, he was made to believe that he had fallen
overboard, and was told to save himself by swimming, when they told
him to dive for his life, as a shark was pursuing him, which he
attempted so energetically, that he threw himself from the locker, by
which he bruised himself severely. Again, after the landing of the
army, he was found one day asleep in his tent, and apparently much
annoyed with the noise of the cannonading then going on briskly. He
was made to believe he was engaged with the enemy, when he expressed
much fear, and betrayed a wish to run away. They remonstrated against
this cowardice, whilst they increased his alarm by imitating the
groans of the wounded; and when he inquired who was killed, which he
often did, they named his particular friends. At last he was told that
the man next him in the line had fallen, when he instantly sprang from
his sleep, and relived from his fears, by falling over the tent ropes.
It is added, that after these experiments, he had not distinct
recollection of his dreams, but only a confused feeling of oppression
or fatigue; and used to say to his friends, that he was sure they had
been playing him some tricks.
I shall add one illustration of the probability of benefit accruing
to society from this subject being prosecuted with zeal and due
consideration. A highly scientific friend, who had honoured me with
his presence at a private conversazione, called two days thereafter,
and state, that from reflecting on what I had said and exhibited the
day before as to the mode of exciting certain points or functions of
the brain through acting on certain points of the scalp and face, it
appeared to him most reasonable to expect that by applying such
points, we might most readily afford relief to disorder of the
corresponding internal organs. I told him I was so thoroughly induced
to act accordingly; and that the day before I had been visiting an
insane patient, who entertained the horrible idea, that she must
murder ever body she knew, and then murder herself also; that on
placing my hand upon the organ of combativeness and destructiveness,
in a few seconds, she gave a violent shudder, and seemed greatly
excited, and becoming perfectly furious. On examining these parts, I
found the integuments quite red. I ordered leeches, and cold lotion
afterwards, but next day she remained equally violent, and the pulse
between 140 and 150, which it had been for some time, notwithstanding
medicines had been given to depress it. I now made an incision an inch
and a half long through the integuments, and down to the bone, and in
twelve hours after found her much calmer, and the pulse down to 100,
and t remained there for several days. There was no such loss of blood
as could have acted constitutionally on the heart directly by the
quantity effused. On again rising, Belladonna plasters were applied -
these not having the desired effect, recourse was again had to
scarification behind both ears, and with great success, as in a few
days she was so calm as not to requite the strait jacket, and for two
months has been sullen but harmless.
At another conversazione, the same gentleman requested me to excite
philoprogenitiveness, which I did, and he then asked me to combine
destructiveness along with it. I told him the faculty would not be
developed, because the organ was so small in this patient as to make
her always imagine some one was quarrelling with her. Still he wished
me to try, which I did, and the result was that she immediately seemed
distressed about some one being angry with the children. Two days
after I was informed that the object of the request was to prove that
such would be the case, as he had whispered to a professional
gentleman present, before the answer was elicited, and no one else in
the room knew this remark. Two days after, on a slip of paper handed
to me by the same gentleman, he had noted, that if I would excite the
same organs in another patient, whose destructiveness was more
prominent, I would find she would be angry with the children, and wish
to punish or send them away, and assuredly it proved so. He also
added, that this is the combination of morbid excitement which he
conjectured, and I think with great justice, is the cause of parents
murdering their own children during a fit of insanity. An example of
more acute, beautiful, and successful induction than this could
scarcely be conceived possible; and it is highly gratifying to know
that the pinions of a gentleman of such talents and attainments
coincides so much with my general views on this subject.
The doctrine propounded by the Rev. La Roy Sunderland, and Mr
Spencer T. Hall, and others, seems to be this, that there is a
separate organ in the brain for every mental faculty, emotion,
propensity, desire, and action, mental or corporeal; that every
positive organ has also its negative organ proximate; and that by
certain manipulations during the mesmeric state, these organs may be
stimulated into activity singly or combined, and thus caused to
manifest the corresponding faculty by thought, word, and action. They
do not deny the correctness of the outlines as given by former
phrenologists; on the contrary, they bear positive testimony to their
general correctness. However, they subdivide each of the former
faculties, which we may designate the pure faculties, into groups of
distinct organs, for the specific manifestation of special faculties,
the tendencies to which were naturally included in the simple or
primitive general organ; and they allege they can thus give such a
special or characteristic direction to the feeling as to entitle it to
be considered as the manifestation of a distinct organ or faculty.
It occurs to me, that this might be much simplified, by considering,
that on the central point of the general organs, we stimulate
fasciculi of nerves connected with a general manifestation, for
example, benevolence; but that, as we approach the surrounding organs,
we partially excite proximate faculties, from some of their
corresponding peripheral sentient nerves co-mingling with those of the
other faculty, and thus engender a mixed manifestation; just as we
find the intercourse between neighbouring countries modifies the
national character which peculiarly belongs to each nation. thus, in
one direction, benevolence (by which I illustrate my position) will be
blended with comparison, or excited through the influence of
association respecting some one we have known, or from supposing what
might be our feelings were we placed in such and such circumstances;
in another direction, it will be influenced more or less by the
tendency to imitate the benevolent acts of others, and, as we approach
veneration, it will partake more of a religious and moral obligation
in reference to the Deity. If I am right in this conjecture, of course
there will be every possible shade of manifestation as we approach
nearer to the adjoining organ. I am not acquainted with the mapping of
the head either by La Roy Sunderland or Mr Hall; but, if the original
compartments are to be so divided and subdivided, according to the
mere varieties of manifestation during the hypnotic state, I feel
assured, that each of their subdivisions may be again divided,
as a shade of difference will be manifested by every possible change
in the point of contact.
I had much pleasure in witnessing Mr Hall's experiments, and bore
public testimony to the reality of the general phenomena. This I could
have done from the mere circumstance of carefully watching the
peculiar expression of countenance, and state of the respiration,
induced by every move of the point of contact. The shades of
difference were so minute that collusion was all but impossible.
Moreover, I had personal experience of the reality of the leading
phenomena in a number of my own patients, with parties who know
nothing of phrenology, and whose respectability and known character
placed them above the possibility of being suspected as acting a part,
either for the purpose of gratifying or deceiving others. Whilst I
readily bear testimony to the reality of the phenomena, and I saw
nothing in Mr Hall to lead me to suppose he wished to deceive any one,
it is due to the cause of truth for me to state, that the varieties
which I observed in his phenomena and those occurring in my own
patients, I consider were the mere results of the different
manipulations used, and not of any such special influence as
he and other animal magnetizers allege.
In reference to the phenomena which were designated "cross-magnetizing",
and which appeared most distressing to the patients, as well as to the
operator, (fortunately no such effects have occurred in my patients,)
I think they may be explained thus: it seems probably, part may be the
result of imagination, or an accidental circumstance exciting the
opposing classes of muscles into action at the same time. This may
also be caused by exciting two antagonistic emotions, such as on e
requiring the energetic action of the muscles of inspiration, and the
other the muscles of expiration, the consequence of which is, very
speedily to throw the patient into a state of partial asphyxia; and
the result must be, a great difficulty in restoring the patient from
the deleterious influence of insufficiently decarbonated blood
circulating through the brain. Such I consider was the case with the
patient I saw create so much trouble to Mr Hall on the evening of the
24th February, 1843, in the lecture-room oft the Athenaeum,
Manchester.
Having heard Mr hall state, that patients who had stolen any thing
would always seek out the persons from whom it had been taken, and
restore it to them after conscientiousness as excited, and that they
would find out the rightful owner, whatever part of the room he had
removed to, I was curious to prove this. My first object was to
ascertain whether it as a fact, which I very soon did with my own
patients, and my next objective was to ascertain by what means
they accomplished this, and I readily determined it was by
means of smell and touch. The first thing they did, on
rousing conscientiousness, was to look thoughtful, then they began
sniffing, and traced out the parties robbed, and restored it to them.
When asked, what are you doing? the answer was, "I am giving back
something which I had stolen." On being asked, how do you know
the person? (having gone to the opposite side of the room,) the answer
was, "I smell them, or him." Every time the experiment was
tried, the result was the same and the answer the same, as was obvious
to every one in the room. Another patient di the same when the
sense of smell was acute, but when I tired the experiment with the
sense of smell dulled, the stolen article was merely laid
down, without giving it to the proper person. There was thus both
positive and negative proof of exalted smell being the cause of them
restoring to the proper party; and feeling directs them as to place. I
have found this done with the same promptitude and certainty when six,
eight, or twelve faculties had been roused and manifested before
conscientiousness was excited. I have found this same in all I have
tried, only some will throw the article down as if horrorstruck.
The movement of the jaws also, and various other movements in
imitation of the operator, I have ascertained arise from their
remarkable power of hearing extremely faint sounds, and the
most curious point is this, that they seem to have the power of
discerning such faint sounds, when they seem not to be
affected by very loud sounds. It is also the same with
feeling. They will in some states be insensible to pricking, pinching,
or maiming, but so highly sensible to a breath of air, or the tickling
of a feather, that they may be instantly roused by the latter means,
when the former would have no such influence. Probably this is the
cause of the remarkable effects of a current of air, its rousing
cutaneous sensibility, directing the nervous influences to the skin,
and withdrawing it from rigid muscles, thus reducing the cataleptiform
state, and permitting the blood and vis nervosa to flow in
their usual manner. The latter change being induced gradually, may
probably be the cause of the feeling which is described as that of
needles and pins running into the extremities, and producing a
twitching, when gently pressing on the extremity with the finger, &c.
as already noticed.
In concluding this chapter, I am well aware the statements it
contains must appear startling, and almost beyond belief, to many of
my readers. Some may be disposed to think I have been deceived; and
because many of the manifestations might be simulated, I know
it has been alleged, that the patients of those who have been
exhibited publicly, were wither deceiving the operator, or that both
patients and operators were engaged in a shameful system of collusion.
In respect to my own patients, I have endeavoured to take every
possible precaution that they should not deceive me, and with
this view have invited the most sceptical persons I know, both in the
profession and out of it, to have it rigorously tested, and
the result has been my entire conviction as tot the reality of the
phenomena in my own patients, and I am ready to believe others
to be as candid as myself. Because much might be simulated,
and parties have been avowedly trained and exhibited to prove the
dexterity of teachers and pupils in a system of avowed collusion, that
it might thereby be inferred the patients exhibited by other lecturers
were impostors, is a most illogical mode of deciding such a question.
there ought to be positive proof of the justice of such imputation,
before so assailing any one, when there is so much proof to the
contrary, as has been furnished by the concurrent testimony of so many
experimenters who have met with such susceptible subjects. Surely it
would not be fair to infer, that because some are trained as dexterous
thieves, there can, therefore, be no such thing as an honest man in
the world?
The question to be decided here is not what patients can be trained
to do in violation to nature's laws; that is, by giving them some
stronger motive of action, by artificial means, than the impulse
arising from natural feeling. What might be achieved in this way I
know not, as I have not tried such experiments connected with this
branch of the subject. It is well known, however, that so long ago as
December, 1841, I particularly pointed out the remarkable docility of
patients during Hypnotism, which made them most anxious to comply with
every proper request of supposed wish of others. I have, therefore, no
more doubt that they might be trained to manifest, during Hypnotism,
opposite tendencies, in accordance with conventional arrangements,
than that during their waking moments they could be taught to do so,
and thus call black white and white black, night day and day night,
and such like, in respect to every custom, word, or action. The proper
question to be determined seems to me to be this, - Can the passions,
and emotions, and intellectual faculties, be excited during Hypnotism
simply by contact or friction over certain sympathetic points of the
head and face, without previous knowledge of phrenology, training, or
whispering, or such leading questions as must naturally excite in the
mind such passions, emotions, or mental and bodily manifestations? My
own experience warrants me to answer in the affirmative, and I shall
give a few additional cases in illustration of the data from which I
have come to this conclusion. Two patients, healthy, strong servant
girls, entirely ignorant of phrenology, neither of whom has ever seen
an experiment, and one was so sceptical, as to wish to try and
convince me she could not be hypnotized at all, were operated
on separately. At first trial, I succeeded in hypnotizing both, and in
developing a great number of the leading organs, such as the desire to
eat, benevolence, friendship, pity, attachment, self-esteem, love of
approbation, imitation, (when they readily spoke five languages
correctly,) stealing under acquisitiveness, and under
conscientiousness restoring to the proper person and place what was
stolen; eventuality most remarkable: this was tried twice or thrice in
each, when they could tell correctly the events of the previous day
while the organ was excited, whereas they could not tell a single
circumstance before it was stimulated; and a number of others, such as
forms, figures, and colours, by exciting the corresponding points.
These experiments were tried before several friends, who were
astonished with the result, several of the most remarkable
manifestations being evinced without a single word being spoken by any
one. They were not tried at the same time, and neither saw nor know of
the other.
Mr. T., a gentleman of 45 years of age, who was ignorant of
phrenology, and had never seen a hypnotic experiment, was hypnotized
without expecting any experiment of the kind to be tried. On touching
"benevolence" the manifestation was so powerful as to compel
me quickly to desist; "self-esteem", very decidedly; "ideality",
very decided, combined with "tune and language", he sang
when the latter were pressed on, but instantly stopped when the
pressure was removed, and resumed as readily on renewing the contact,
exactly at the same note and word where he left off. Also the usual
spectra when the region of the orbit as pressed on. When aroused, he
was quite unconscious of all which had happened. He has been tried
three times, with the same results, only that additional
manifestations came out. His friends, who were present, can testify he
had no signal given to lead him to do so. His wife, also, who had
never seen any thing of the kind before, was operated on, when a great
many manifestations came out most decidedly. Their daughter, who had
seen nothing of this, was now called into the room, and operated on,
and exhibited a great many manifestations, and all this by the mere
effect of pressure and gentle friction on the integuments. None of the
three remembered any of what had happened.
W.T. a boy, had been magnetized, and exhibited a few manifestations.
He was again tried in public, but without success. I was requested to
try him, when a number of manifestations came out at once beautifully
- under benevolence, he took off his coat to give to some distressed
person, and after a number of other manifestations had been educed, on
being awakened he seemed very much surprised to find his coat off.
John W., 22 years of age, had been magnetized publicly, with the
hope of eliciting the phrenological manifestations, but he became so
stolid that it was quite a failure. I was afterwards requested to try
him, in my way, in the presence of a number of gentlemen, when I at
once succeeded in exciting several; pity was so characteristic, that
there could be no difficulty or doubt upon the subject, as it was not
only exhibited by his features and sobbing, but by the tears which ran
over his face in torrents. On trying to excite imitation, on the right
side, no effect was produced, which I suspected to be the result of an
injury he had sustained, which had destroyed the integuments, and also
caused exfoliation of the outer table of the skull. I therefore tried
in the opposite side of the cranium, when the faculty was manifested
beautifully. This seems a good corroboration of my theory, that it
arises from the peculiar condition of the nerves of the scalp. On
farther trials many more came out without any cause beyond simple
excitation of the integuments by pressure and friction. Not only may
such general manifestations be thus excited, but, what is far more
curious, by exciting antagonist points in the opposite
hemispheres of the brain, the patients may be made to exhibit
correspondingly opposite feelings in the different sided of the body.
If the antagonist faculties are excited on the same side,
there will be exhibited only the stronger of the two. These "opposite
influences on the two sides", as Dr Elliotson has well remarked, "are
the most astonishing and beautiful experiments that all physiology
affords"; and are also the most beautiful examples of the
correctness of Mr Mayo's fifteenth aphorism, at page 28 of his Nervous
System and its Functions, where he says, "Each lateral half of a
vertebral animal is separately vitalized. Or the preservation of
consciousness in one half is independent of its preservation in the
other." It is true that vivisections have proved this, but
neither so beautifully or humanely as in the experiments I now refer
to, and those already recorded at page 63 of this treatise. Miss S., a
lady who had never seen a phreno-hypnotic experiment, and knew nothing
of phrenology, exhibited at first trial a great number of the leading
manifestation, and at a second and third, these opposite ones in a
remarkable manner. Under friendship and adhesiveness, she embraced a
female friend in the most affectionate manner, and on destructiveness
being excited on the opposite side of the head, she rushed
forward with great impetuosity to repel some imaginary adversary,
whilst, with her other arm and hand, she contrived to shield her
friend. Had I not laid hold of her, she would most certainly have
rushed through the window. On being roused she was quite oblivious of
all she had done. Mrs C. another equally ignorant of the subject,
displayed the same phenomena. The effect of music in exciting to
ecstasy, elegance of movement, and graceful dancing, was most
remarkable. Remembered nothing. Miss -----, entirely ignorant of the
subject, and had never seen an experiment of the kind, and expecting
only to be attempted to be hypnotized, but whilst she wished
to be tried, she had expressed to the friend who introduced her, that
she could not be made to sleep. She exhibited veneration solemnly,
with hope, glowing devotion, and with ideality and language,
overwhelming ecstasy, expression her happiness and prospect of
entering into heaven; "self-esteem", the most conceited
prude; "firmness" most decided; "adhesiveness and
friend ship", and this on one side, and "combativeness and
destructiveness" on the other at pleasure; "imitation"
in perfection, speaking correctly every language tried, "benevolence"
extremely marked, to the effusion of tears; "acquisitiveness,
conscientiousness, eventuality, the desire to eat , to smell, spectra,"
&c. &c. She was quite unconscious of all that had happened,
and the friend who brought her to me knows she had no prompting. She
has been tried once since with the same results.
Some parties, who were excellent critics, after seeing the latter
and two others operated on, and expressing their utter astonishment
with the accurate and natural manner in which every passion and
emotion was manifested, expressed a strong desire to see some one
operated on for the first time. I offered to operate on any of three
young ladies whom they had introduced to me that afternoon, and whom I
had not know previously; indeed, one was a stranger in town, from the
south of England, who knew nothing of hypnotism or phrenology, and had
no faith in either, notwithstanding what she had just seen. She, Miss
S., sat down an entire sceptic, but in a few minutes was not only most
decidedly hypnotized, but also one of the most beautiful and decided
examples which could possibly have been met with of the phrenological
sway during hypnotism, simply by stimulating stimulating the nerves of
the scalp and face. The moment "veneration" was touched,
her features assumed the peculiar expression of that feeling, the
hands were clasped, she sank on her knees in the attitude of the most
devout adoration; combined with "hope," the features were
illuminated, and beamed with a feeling of ecstasy, the hands being
unclasped and moved about in the utmost delight; and when "ideality"
was added, the ecstasy was so extreme as scarcely to be supportable.
On changing the point of contact to "firmness," she
instantly arose, and stood with an attitude of defiance; "self-esteem,"
flounced about with the utmost self-importance; the "love of
approbation" was painted to the greatest perfection; "irritation"
imitated accurately every thing done or spoken in any language; "friendship
and adhesiveness," clasped hold of me; and by stimulating "combativeness"
on the opposite side of the head, along with the other, she struck out
with the arm of the side on which combativeness had been touched, but
held me fast, as it to protect me, with the other. Under "benevolence,"
she seemed much affected, and distributed her property to the
imaginary distressed objects her fancy had painted; under "acquisitiveness"
she stole, and under "conscientiousness" she restored; "tune,"
the desire for music, and sang beautifully, a waltz being played, she
danced with a grace and elegance surpassing all which any of us ever
witnessed. Eventuality was also most remarkable; the desire to eat, to
smell, was also excited; also form, figures, colours, &c.;
philoprogenitiveness admirable. All this was done at first trial, with
an entire stranger, and the lady's immediate friends, as well as
others present, can bear testimony that there was not the slightest
prompting either by one or other, and when awakened she was quite
unconscious of all which had happened. This lady has been twice
operated on since, when all these manifestations, and many others,
were exhibited in the most perfect manner, as can be certified by Sir
Thomas Arbuthnot, Major Wilbraham, Colonel Wemyss, the Rev. Mr P., and
another high dignitary of the church, and the patient's family and
friends; and that when under "number" she wrote down a sum,
and under "constructiveness and ideality," she drew a very
good sketch of a cottage, putting in doors and windows correctly. The
uncle of the latter subject was so much astonished and gratified with
what he had seen, that he begged I would try one of his daughters. I
hypnotized the eldest, and all the manifestations came out quite as
decidedly as in her cousin. Under "adhesiveness and friendship,"
she clasped me, and on stimulating the organ of "combativeness"
on the opposite side of the head, with the arm of that side she struck
two gentlemen (whom she imagined were about to attack me), in such a
manner as nearly laid one on the floor, whilst with the other arm she
held me in the most friendly manner. Under "benevolence,"
she seemed quite overwhelmed with compassion; "acquisitiveness,"
stole greedily all she could lay her hands on, which was retained,
whilst I excited many other manifestations, but the moment my fingers
touched "conscientiousness," she threw all she had stolen on
the floor, as if horror-stricken, and burst into a flood of tears; on
being asked, Why do you cry, she said, with the utmost agony, "I
have done done what was wrong, I have done what was wrong." I now
excited "imitation and ideality," and had her laughing and
dancing in an instant. On exciting form and ideality, she seemed
alarmed, and when asked what she saw, she answered, "The D---l".
What colour is he? "Black." On pressing the eyebrow, and
repeating the question, the answer was, "red," and the whole
body instantly became rigid, and the face the most complete picture of
horror which could be imagined. "Destructiveness," which is
largely developed, being touched, she struck her father such a blow on
the chest as nearly laid him on the floor, had I not endeavoured to
restrain her, he must have sustained serious injury, Having now
excited veneration, hope, ideality, and language, we had the most
striking example imaginable of extreme ecstasy, and on being aroused,
she was quite unconscious of all that had happened, excepting that she
had heard music, and had been dancing, Her philoprogenitiveness was
admirable. [Footnote: There were a dozen present on this occasion, of
whom Mr Vandenhoff was one. Being well known as an accomplished
artist, I requested him to watch all he saw with the most critical
attention, and to tell me whether the passions were painted naturally
or the contrary. After witnessing the first case with evident delight
and surprise, he made the following observation,- "If this is
acting, it is the most perfect acting I have ever seen. In acting, we
aim at being natural, but there is generally some point in which we
fail; but here I see nature's language in every point." Similar
expressions followed, in what was seen in the next two cases, and when
he witnessed the effects on the two ladies, whose cases have just been
recorded, he confessed himself so overpowered, as to be scarcely
capable of expressing his feelings of delight and astonishment, but
said he should write me on the subject. The following is part of a
letter I received from him two days after,- "I thank you for your
kind invitation to witness a repetition of those experiments which so
much delighted me on Saturday last, and with the result of which I was
no less gratified than astonished. Never have I seen nature
manifesting herself more distinctly - never so beautifully, as in the
course of the exhibition on that evening. I believe you know I was a
decided sceptic in the mesmeric influence - and I was something more
in relation to its phrenological sway - of which the manifestations
while under its mysterious influence, by the two young ladies of my
own immediate acquaintance, who had not, who could not have had, any
knowledge of the subject prior to their experience on that evening,
have perfectly convinced me by their truthfulness. I may take a
farther opportunity to dilate more fully upon this interesting and
wonderful discovery, the beneficial results of which cannot yet be
appreciated, because we know not to what extent they may be carried
out."]
At a conversazione a few days after, in the presence of Lady S., Sir
Thomas Arbuthnot, Colonel Arbuthnot, Major Wilbraham, John Frederick
Foster, Esq. Chairman of the Quarter Sessions, D. Maude, Esq,
stipendiary magistrate, and many others, both gentlemen and ladies,
after exhibiting the phenomena on those who had been previously
tested, there was a wish expressed to see some one operated on for
the first time. I offered to try any one present, and a lady at
length consented, whom I never saw before that day, nor since. She
exhibited all the usual phenomena very decidedly. Under "acquisitiveness,"
she stole two handkerchiefs from ladies, and a ring from Mr Foster's
finger. After several manifestations had been exhibited, the moment I
touched "conscientiousness," she seemed distressed, and set
off and searched out the proper parties to whom to restore the
respective articles. 'They had changed places, but she found them out,
and gave back the handkerchiefs to their owners, and also put the ring
on the very finger of Mr Foster from which she had taken it. She was a
strict methodist, who had never danced in her life, and who, if awake,
would have considered it a sin to dance. However, under the excitement
of suitable music, she cut a very good figure at waltzing. When
awakened, she remembered nothing of all which had happened.
Miss L., a lady of twenty-one years of age, very accomplished, and
with great energy of mind, braved me to try to hypnotize her. She felt
assured I could not do so. However, she was very soon under the
influence, and gave twenty manifestations in the most decided manner.
Under friendship and adhesiveness, and destructiveness on the opposite
side, she protected me, and struck her own mother. She knew only one
organ, and was inclined to scoff at hypnotism and still more so at
phreno-hypnotism. Under form and ideality she wrote very nicely,
without the use of her eyes, but by no means equal to what she does
when awake. When awakened she seemed surprised when told what had
happened. She remembered me touching her head, wondered what I was
doing it for, said she felt different impulses arise when I was
manipulating different parts, but did not know why, nor could she
remember what she had done.
A married lady, Mrs E., and the mother of a family, would not
believe any one could be so affected. After seeing one patient done,
she still felt assured she, at least, could not be so operated on. I
desired her to try, and she at once exhibited upwards of twenty
manifestations in the most distinct manner, some of them very
strikingly. Under benevolence she shed tears, drew out her purse, and
gave half-a-crown "to the poor creatures." She also
exhibited the opposite tendencies at the same time, as already
described.
Miss R., a young lady of 22 years of age, very well educated, and
intelligent, wished to be tried, because she was decidedly sceptical.
It so happened that every manifestation tried came out beautifully and
prominently, although, when aroused, she admitted she remembered every
thing she had done, and added, that she had resisted to the utmost of
her power doing any thing, but felt irresistible impulses come over
her to act in the way she did, as I touched certain points, but why it
was she could not tell. Declared it was not from any association with
what ought to be the case, as she was ignorant of the organs, but
added, that she first felt a drawing in the muscles of the face, and
then the breathing became affected, and with this the peculiar impulse
followed. On another occasion, with the eves bandaged, she had a
pencil put in her right hand, when a number of organs were excited,
but she showed no evidence of any desire to use the pencil till "constructiveness
and ideality" were excited. The moment this was done, however,
she scrambled till she got some paper, and began drawing, and made a
very tolerable profile. When "acquisitiveness" was excited,
she stole a ring off Mr Foster's finger, who, while I was exciting
various manifestations, left the room. The moment I touched "conscientiousness,"
she set off in search of Mr Foster, walked round the room the very way
he went, then left that room, crossed the lobby into the front
parlour, and having made a gyration in this room she came out and went
into a back parlour, where she found Mr Foster, and put the ring on
the very finger from whence she took it. She evidently traced him
through the air by smell, as she followed the exact track he had
taken, for he had first gone into the front parlour. Had it been by
clairvoyance, she of course ought to have gone to him direct, and by
the shortest way. Such facts are almost past belief, but here they are
as they happened, and there could not have been more competent.
individuals, than those present, to detect any mistake or deception,
namely, Mr Foster, Mr Brandt, and Mr Lloyd, barristers; Mr Langton, Mr
Bagshaw, Mr Schwabe, and many others, both gentlemen and ladies. Miss
W., a very intelligent lady, who knew nothing of phrenology, and had
never seen a phreno-hypnotic experiment, was operated on. On "benevolence"
being excited, she seemed very distressed, and when asked what she was
thinking of, said it was of a poor man who had lost his saw and
hammer, that he had no money to purchase others with, and his children
were starving. Under "veneration and ideality," wished to
die, to go to heaven; under combativeness, first looked very angry,
then jumped up and gave a blow, which upset the candlestick. On "destructiveness"
being excited, (after she had exhibited several other organs,) she
shook her fist, then started on her feet, looked furious, and sprang
across the room, her arm at full length, similar to a person fencing,
and seized hold of a young lady's hand, and nearly transfixed it with
her nails.
Mr Walker, twenty-two years of age, after passing into the hypnotic
state, shewed no symptoms of susceptibility for some time, but at
length he did so in the most perfect manner; namely, benevolence,
veneration, firmness, self-esteem, combativeness, destructiveness,
acquisitiveness, caution, conscientiousness, imitation in perfection,
pity, benevolence with the one side, and destructiveness on the other,
eventuality, smell, form, colours, number, ideality, &c. This
gentleman has seen busts and phreno-hypnotic experiments also, but,
excepting two or three, would be puzzled to point out any of the
organs correctly when awake. He remembered nothing of what had passed.
Being desirous of ascertaining whether he might not, during
hypnotism, remember the organs better than whilst awake, and thus be
led to give the manifestations in the manner he did, I tried the
following experiment. I explained my intentions to the friends who
were to be present, but he was entirely ignorant of them. He had never
seen or heard of such experiment having been tried. When I considered
him in the proper condition, I requested him to place the point of a
finger on different organs, but it was remarkable that he was wrong in
every instance, even with respect to the few he knew when awake.
Another most interesting fact was discovered, that whilst his mind was
directed to the organ I had named, the true manifestation of
the point touched came out in every instance. Thus,
when requested to point out ideality, he placed the finger over "veneration,"
and immediately indicated that feeling. When asked what he was
thinking about? "I did not go to church yesterday." What of
that? "It was wrong." When he accidentally pressed on
benevolence, the feeling was manifested; firmness in like manner;
self-esteem in a powerful degree. On evincing symptoms of uneasiness,
I asked what he was thinking of ? he replied, "something hurts my
head." The fact was, his arm had become cataleptiform and the
points of the fingers were pressed so strongly against the scalp as to
be the cause of complaint, but he had no idea of that. His hand having
rested on philoprogenitiveness, he began to hush and rock on his chair
as if nursing a baby, his motion became more and more violent till I
judged it necessary to put a stop to it, by removing his hand.
However, I found his arm and neck had both become so rigid, that they
were too firmly fixed to permit of being separated by mechanical
force, but so soon as this was reduced, by blowing on them, the
peculiar manifestation ceased. Every point pressed on by him shewed
the same tendency to excite its peculiar manifestation. I am quite
certain this gentleman acted a candid part, and could not be induced
to do otherwise by any one.
Another most interesting fact connected with the latter case, was
the circumstance of his having hypnotized himself, excited the
different manifestations as stated; and on being requested to rub his
eyes, he did so, and thus roused himself from the hypnotic condition.
I have tried similar experiments with many other patients, and, with
the exception of two, each of whom hit upon one organ, have found none
of them could point accurately to the organ named, but in every
instance the usual indication of the peculiar organ touched came out.
None of these subjects remembered any thing of what had happened.
Here, then, we have decided proof, that all the phenomena of
hypnotizing, exciting the phrenological manifestations, and rousing to
the waking condition may be accomplished by the personal acts of the
patient on himself, as the only influence required to excite him to
the necessary movement might be conveyed by an automaton.
A few days ago, one of these patients, who knows no foreign
language, when imitation and tune were excited, followed correctly
both the music and words of Italian, French, and German songs, which
she never heard till they were played and sung by the wife of a
learned barrister, who was also present himself, and who, with the
Rev. Mr F. and his lady, can bear testimony to the great accuracy of
her performance. Such is the power of Hypnotism.
Besides the twenty-five cases here briefly recorded, I have had many
more exhibiting the phenomena in the same decided manner, simply by
exciting the Sympathetic points by contact. If I am to believe the
evidence of my senses, therefore, in any thing, I cannot see
how I can doubt the relation which subsists between certain points of
the cranium, and the mental manifestations, which are excited by
acting on them during Hypnotism. I believe there are very few
physiological phenomena which can be more clearly demonstrated,
especially at such an early stage of their investigation. Were it not
that I consider it would only be an unnecessary waste of time to
prosecute the investigation farther, after the number of most
unequivocal cases which have been met with by myself, as well as by
other experimentalists here and elsewhere, I feel convinced I might
soon increase the number of my own cases to any extent I chose.
With all intelligent and honest experimentalists I anticipate
similar results to what happened with Mr Ebbage, an intelligent
surgeon at Leamington. He had been a determined sceptic, and had much
annoyed several of our mutual friends by his strong expressions to
that effect, However, whilst on a visit at Manchester lately, at our
first interview, I made a convert of him by offering to exhibit the
phenomena in his own wife, who had never been so operated on, or even
tried the experiment. She soon became decidedly hypnotized, and also
exhibited several phrenological manifestations most distinctly. A
servant of the family was now called into the room, who had seen no
operation of the kind, and did not know what was to be done. She also
became decidedly hypnotized, and exhibited several phrenological
manifestations most, distinctly. Mr E. now admitted that rational
scepticism could not resist such conclusive evidence; and having seen
another case or two at my house, of remarkably susceptible subjects,
with instructions from me how to operate, be promised to prosecute the
inquiry on his return home.
In a letter to me, dated lst May, 1843, he writes that he had tried
the experiments with several; that in some he was unsuccessful, while
"in others a perfect state of sleep and unconsciousness was
produced at different periods, varying from two to ten minutes. In the
case of one lady, who had never seen any thing of the kind before,
and, I may add, had not even heard it spoken of as connected with any
phrenological developments, the most marked effects were soon
produced, resembling very strongly the case you shewed me when I was
at your house." He farther adds the following judicious remarks:-
"I must say the peculiar development shewn by the influence of
this sleep, if closely and scrutinizingly watched, must open to the
mind of any thinking man a wide expanse for speculation as to the
truly mysterious means by which the effects of sensation and emotion
can be produced."
The above is a good illustration of what may be done, even by a
determined but honest sceptic. Mr E. had only two interviews with me;
and if any one should be less successful in his attempts, it behoves
him to inquire, whether his failures are not to be attributed to his
unskilful or uncandid performance of the experiments, rather than to
inefficiency of the method recommended.
As to those who will not believe the testimony of others without
seeing the experiments tried before themselves, on fresh patients, I
beg to remark, that the best plan is for them to try patients fairly
themselves, and they must soon be convinced; only they must be careful
to take them at the proper time, otherwise they may fail as I
did myself at first.
The following is the mode of operating:- Put the patient into the
hypnotic condition in the usual way, extend his arms for a minute or
two, then replace them gently on his lap, and allow him to remain
perfectly quiet for a few minutes. Let the points of one or two
fingers be now placed on the central point of any of his best
developed organs, and press it very gently; if no change of
countenance or bodily movement is evinced, use gentle friction, and
then in a soft voice ask what he is thinking of, what he would like,
or wish to do, or what he sees, as the function of the organ may
indicate; and repeat the questions and the pressure, or contact, or
friction, over the organ till an answer is elicited. If very stolid,
gentle pressure on the eyeballs may be necessary to induce him to
speak. If the skin is too sensitive, he may awake, in which case try
again, waiting a little longer; if too stolid, try again
beginning the manipulations sooner.
The operations should be tried again and again with the same
patient, varying the time of beginning the manipulations, as it is
impossible to tell, a priori, the exact moment they should be
commenced; and many of the best cases have only succeeded partially,
or not at all, at a first or second trial. When this point has been
hit upon, however, there will be little difficulty in getting out
additional manifestations, and this will be still more evident at each
succeeding trial. Whispering or talking should be carefully avoided by
all present, so as to leave nature to manifest herself in her own way,
influenced only by the stimulus conveyed through the nerves of touch
exciting to automatic muscular action. We all know that during common
sleep a person unconsciously changes from an uncomfortable
position to one which is agreeable. This is a sort of instinctive
action, and, as already explained, I think it highly probable, that by
thus calling into action muscles which are naturally so exerted in
manifesting any given emotion or propensity, they may, by reflection,
thereby rouse that portion of the brain, the activity of which usually
excites the motion. In this case there would be a sort of inversion of
the ordinary sequence, what is naturally the consequence becoming the
cause of cerebral and mental excitation. The following hypothesis will
illustrate my meaning. It is easy to imagine, that putting a pen or
pencil into the hand might excite in the mind the idea of writing or
drawing or that stimulating the gastrochnemius, which raises us on our
toes, might naturally enough suggest to the
mind the idea of dancing, without any other suggestion to that
effect than what arises from the
attitude and activity of the muscles naturally and necessarily
brought into play whilst exercising such functions. However, I would
very much doubt the probability of stimulating the muscles of the leg
exciting the idea of writing, or that placing a pen or pencil in the
hand would excite the idea. of dancing, without previous concert and
arrangement to that effect. It is upon the same principle, as I
imagine, that, during the dreamy state of hypnotism by stimulating the
sterno-mastoid muscle, which causes an inclination of the heart, the
idea of friendship and shaking of hands is excited in the mind, and
when the trapizus is excited at same time, the greater lateral
inclination of the head manifests still greater attachment, or "adhesiveness."
Philoprogenitiveness, by calling into action the recti and occipito
frontalis muscles, gives the rocking motion, and hence the idea of
nursing, &c.; pressure on the vertex, by calling into action all
the muscles requisite to sustain the body in the erect position,
excites the idea of unyielding firmness; veneration and benevolence,
from giving the tendency to stoop and suppress the breathing, thus
create the corresponding feelings. By exciting the muscles of
mastication into action, the idea of eating and drinking is roused,
and the same may arise from pressing between the chin and under lip,
which excites a flow of saliva, and this again the motion of the
tongue and jaws, with an inclination to swallow. In like manner,
gently pressing the tip of the nose, by exciting inspiration, creates
the desire for something to smell at; if the point of contact is the
cheek, under the orbits, over the exit of the infra-orbital branch of
the fifth pair, the breathing becomes suppressed, and depressing
emotions are excited; whereas, above the orbit, so as to
stimulate the supra-orbital branch of the fifth pair,
generally the reverse manifestations are evinced.
Those familiar with Professor Weber's experiments, know that each of
those points differs from the other in its degree of sensibility. It
is remarkable that the point marked "eventuality," (and
which I have strong grounds for believing is the chief seat of
memory,) is in the centre of the forehead, which is one of the most
sensitive parts of the scalp, and where pressure applied necessarily
excites the corresponding points in both hemispheres of the
brain at the same time. There seems, in fact, to be less matter of
wonder in this discovery than some lately brought forward in other
departments of physical science; for example, who would have believed,
till it was proved, that by looking into a camera-obscura for a few
minutes, or even seconds, he might have his likeness accurately and
indelibly transferred to a plate of metal? or the still more recent
discovery of Professor Moser, that such impressions as he referred to
could be effected in the dark?
I shall conclude this article by a quotation, from Dr Abercrombie,
on the value of testimony. He observes, - "A very small portion
of our knowledge of external things is obtained through our own
senses; by far the greater part is procured through other men, and
this is received by us on the evidence of testimony. While an
unbounded credulity is the part of a weak mind, which never thinks nor
reasons at all, an unlimited scepticism is the part of a contracted
mind, which reasons upon imperfect data, or makes its own knowledge
and extent of observation the standard and test of probability."
On the Intellectual Powers, pp. 71, 72.
top
Chapter 7.
BEFORE concluding the first part of this treatise, I shall make a
short resumé of what I consider the points made out by what has
been advanced. lst, That the effect of a continued fixation of the
mental and visual eye in the manner, and with the concomitant
circumstances pointed out, is to throw the nervous system into a new
condition, accompanied with a state of somnolence, and a tendency,
according to the mode of management, of exciting a variety of
phenomena, very different from those we obtain either in ordinary
sleep, or during the waking condition. 2d, That there is at first a
state of high excitement of all the organs of special sense, sight
excepted, and a great increase of muscular power; and that the senses
afterwards become torpid in a much greater degree than what occurs in
natural sleep. 3d, That in this condition we have the power of
directing or concentrating nervous energy, raising or depressing it in
a remarkable degree, at will, locally or generally. 4th, That in this
state, we have the power of exciting or depressing the force and
frequency of the heart's action, and the state of the circulation,
locally or generally, in a surprising degree. 5th, That whilst in this
peculiar condition, we have the power of regulating and controlling
muscular tone and energy in a remarkable manner and degree. 6th, That
we also thus acquire a power of producing rapid and important changes
in the state of the capillary circulation, and of the whole of the
secretions and excretions of the body, as proved by the application of
chemical tests. 7th, That this power can be beneficially directed to
the cure of a variety of diseases which were most intractable, or
altogether incurable, by ordinary treatment. 8th, That this agency may
be rendered available in moderating or entirely preventing, the pain
incident to patients whilst undergoing surgical operations. 9th, That
during hypnotism, by manipulating the cranium and face, we can excite
certain mental and bodily manifestations, according to the parts
touched.
I have obtained analogous results with so many patients, as to make
me quite certain of the reality of the phenomena referred to,
and to warrant me, as I think, to draw these inferences. Many of the
phenomena are of such a nature as to admit of physical and chemical
proof, in respect to which, the patients cannot possibly deceive us;
and as regards those phenomena where they might do so, I have
had the assurance of so many patients, on whose veracity I can
implicitly rely, proving the same facts, that there remains not the
slightest room for me to doubt the correctness of these
statements. I have been equally anxious to avoid being myself misled,
as I should be not to mislead others; and I would recommend those who
have not had an opportunity of watching such phenomena, in the
most critical manner, or who have not entered on the investigation
with candid minds, to suspend their opinions until they have had such
opportunity. I have no hesitation in saying it is most improbable that
any man should form a just estimate in this matter from mere
reading or hearsay evidence, And equally so if he does not
approach it with a mind open to honest and fair investigation. The
subject itself is so very subtle in its manifestations, so very
different from all we are accustomed to meet with in the ordinary
condition, that, with the utmost candour and openness for receiving
the truth, and the whole truth, it will be found extremely perplexing
to follow it out in many of its bearings. How then can it be expected
anyone should prosecute the inquiry successfully who enters on it with
his mind blinded by indomitable prejudice? [Footnote: It would
perhaps be difficult to adduce a stronger proof of the extent to which
prejudice may overcloud the brightest intellects, and render them
incompetent to do justice to the subject they would investigate, than
that which was presented at a late meeting of the Medico-Chirurgical
Society of London, when a debate took place after the reading of Mr
Ward's case of amputation of the leg during mesmeric sleep. As I am
not an animal magnetiser, nor personally acquainted with any of the
parties referred to, any remarks I am about to make are of course
uninfluenced either by pique or prejudice.
The operation referred to was said to have taken place in a public
hospital; in the presence of medical, and also non-medical witnesses.
The patient is alleged to have exhibited no manifestation of feeling
pain, as far as his countenance could be taken as a correct index, and
there was no movement of the limbs or body; and after the operation he
is said to have declared that he did not feel any pain, but had heard
" a grunching," which it has been inferred was the noise of
the sawing of the bone; and it was also admitted he had groaned during
the time he was under the operation. How was this announcement met?
First, it was questioned whether the man was not a person of little
or no feeling at any time, because other
patients had been known, whilst wide awake, who were very insensible
to pain. But had not the patient, in this ease, been declared to have
been suffering so much pain from his knee, that he had been unable to
sleep, and that his health was so much impaired by his suffering as to
render amputation of the leg indispensable? Nay, had it not been set
forth, that the pain of his leg had been greatly diminished, and his
sleep restored, and his health greatly improved, after he was
mesmerized, preparatory to the operation, which he had
consented to undergo whilst in that state; and yet, that after he had
been asleep, and considered in a fit state for being operated on, the
mere movement of the joint, whilst drawing him to the edge of the bed,
was followed by so much pain as to awake him. Was this any
proof of his being a person devoid of feeling?
Then it is held, that as he heard, as it is presumed he did, the
sawing of the bone, he must have felt the cutting
of the skin and soft parts. It is thus assumed that it is
impossible for a person to hear, and be in the state not to feel
inflictions on the limbs at same time. It is well known, however,
that disease of the trunks of the sentient nerves, or of the spinal
cord, may induce such a state, independently of any lesion of the
brain. But then, say others, had he not felt when the principal
nerve was irritated, the other leg must have been
convulsed. This is assuming, that the speakers fully knew
every law which has been known, or ever shall be known
of the nervous system, in every possible condition, which is
rather a bold position to assume, and what few who have studied the
subject will be disposed to accord even to the gifted individuals
referred to. Others assume the non-expression of feeling was a mere
matter of stoicism, and the general inference to be deduced from the
whole harangues of these parties is, that the whole was a piece of
collusion and deception. Had the parties intended collusion and
deception, would they have admitted that the patient heard the sawing
of the bone, or groaned or moaned during the operation? One gentleman,
the learned editor of a medical journal, I think, admitted he was
bound to believe the testimony of those who had brought the case
forward, but frankly avowed, that for his own part, "he could
not have believed it, although he had seen it himself," When
a man has attained to this state of prejudice and incredulity, of
course it would be idle to adduce to him either experiment or
argument. I would beg respectfully to ask, Had the mind of any of
these gentlemen never entertained the possibility of a patient, long
accustomed to severe pain, moaning from habit, whilst free from pain
at the moment; or even feeling pain, and manifesting the same by
sensible signs during sleep, and yet being quite unconscious
of it when he awoke? Do we never meet with similar results in
consequence of accidents, in the course of disease, or as the effects
of over doses of narcotics? That such is the case during the
artificial sleep induced by the methods I have pointed out in this
treatise, I am quite certain. I am equally certain that the
sensibility to pricking, and pinching, and maiming the rigid limbs, is
gone, some time before hearing disappears. Even a piece of
paper may be inserted, and retained under the eyelids, without the
slightest inconvenience, not even inducing nictitation. In short, I am
quite certain that a patient may be sufficiently sensible to hearing
to enable him to answer questions, whilst unconscious of pricking,
pinching, or strong shocks of galvanism passed through the arms, and
that even when roused sufficiently to give expression to feeling such
inflictions, if allowed to remain quiet a little afterwards, so as to
fall into the profound state again, that he may have lost all
recollection of such inflictions when roused and fully awake.
From the circumstance of the patient having heard, as it is alleged
he did, the sawing of the bone, I am of opinion the operation was
commenced sooner than it should have been; and I think it very
probable that the moaning referred to might have arisen from a slight
feeling of pain, but not sufficient to arouse the patient, or to
impress him sufficiently to enable him to remember it when awake.
In conclusion, from the numerous opportunities I have enjoyed of
witnessing analogous results, in the course of my operations in
Neuro-hypnotism, if I may venture to give an opinion in this matter, I
have no hesitation in expressing my thorough conviction that Mr
Topham, Mr Ward, and the patient, have all spoken and represented the
case with the utmost good faith and candour.
To those who wish to stifle investigation, and hold we ought to rest
satisfied with the decision of the French Commission, I beg to remark,
that a commission of the same learned body was appointed to
investigate and to report on Harvey's discovery of the circulation of
the blood, and that this most important discovery was rejected by them
as a fallacy. Did their decision alter the laws of nature, or prevent
the ultimate triumph of our immortal countryman? And when so much in
error while investigating the more apparent and demonstrable one of
the circulation of the blood, is it not quite as likely that they may
have been mistaken in their decision on the still more abstruse and
subtle subject of the laws and distribution of the nervous influence?
It is matter of history, in respect to the profession in our own
country, that there was not a medical man in England, who had attained
forty years of age, who would believe in the truth of Harvey's
discovery. Is it to be wondered at, then, that Hypnotism should meet
with opposition at the present time?
To conclude these remarks in respect to this operation: the fact
that patients have been known, in some few instances, from natural
causes which were not understood, to have undergone severe surgical
operations without any sense of pain, instead of militating against
the truth of the insensibility of the patient whose limb was amputated
during the nervous sleep, tends directly to confirm it; for if such a
remarkable state can exist from some accidental circumstances not
understood, there is no reason why a similar condition may not be
induced by artificial means.]
As to the proximate cause of the phenomena, I believe the best plan
in the present state of our knowledge, is to go on accumulating facts,
and their application in the cure of disease, and to theorize at some
future period, when we have more ample stores of facts to draw
inferences from. From the first I was of opinion, that much of the
excitement and many of the phenomena developed, were attributable to
the altered state of the circulation in the brain and spinal cord, and
especially to the greater determination of blood to them, and all
other parts not compressed by rigid muscles, arising from the
difficulty, during the cataleptiform state, of the blood being
propelled in due proportion through the rigid extremities. I have not
yet seen occasion to alter this opinion; but rather to conclude, that
the ganglionic, or organic system of nerves, is also
inordinately stimulated from the same cause, and thus having acquired
an undue preponderance induces many of the remarkable phenomena which
have been referred to. Whoever examines carefully the injected state
of the conjunctival membrane, and of the capillary circulation in the
head, face, and neck, the distended state of the jugular veins, the
hard bounding throb of the carotid arteries, and the greatly increased
frequency of the pulse, during the rigid condition of the limbs,
cannot fail to perceive that there is great determination to the head.
Again, when all these symptoms are so speedily changed on reducing the
cataleptiform condition of the limbs, how can it be doubted that the
rigidity of the limbs, and consequent obstruction to free circulation
through them, is the chief cause of the determination to the head and
other parts not directly pressed on by rigid muscles? [Footnote:
In reference to the cataleptiform condition, I beg leave to offer the
following remarks merely by way of conjecture, and with the
hope that they may excite others to direct their attention to the
investigation. Muscular contraction or motion is voluntary or
involuntary. The voluntary arises from a mandate of the mind,
proceeding from the brain, and effecting contraction or shortening of
the muscular fibres; the involuntary, or reflex, from irritation
conveyed to the spinal cord, producing a like result, and may be
excited by tickling, pricking, or pinching the skin of the extremities
of a decapitated or pithed animal. It appears me, however, that much
of the efficiency and tendency to muscular contraction is dependent on
another cause, namely, the state of tone or tension of
the muscles when considered to be in a state of quiescence; and this
state of tone I consider depends on the ganglionic or organic system
of nerves. Supposing, from deficiency of this, the muscular system is
relaxed, a morbid tendency to reflex action will be induced, as a
musical string will be more easily excited to vibrate if moderately
tight, than if drawn very tense. It will also render muscular
effort less efficient and certain, because part of the muscular
contraction, which would have been efficient as available force or
motion, will be expended in bringing up the muscular structure to that
state which ought to have been its normal condition of tension
or tone.
On the other hand, supposing the organic system has been extremely
active, and rendered the muscular tone abnormally great, it
will produce the very reverse effect of that just referred to. It will
not only offer resistance to reflex motion, but also to voluntary
motion; and, if carried to a certain extent, may render the parts
fixed and rigid, from the ganglionic system overpowering the
cerebro-spinal system.
That this is not mere hypothesis seem to me to be in some degree
proved, by the result of operations referred to in my paper in the
Edinburgh Medical and Surgical Journal for October, 1841, where
muscles which had been rigidly contracted, and had lost all power of.
motion, had motion restored by dividing the tendons, and allowing a
new portion to grow between the divided ends, thus elongating the
muscles; and, in other eases, where there was paralysis from
relaxation, power was regained by cutting out a portion of
tendon, bringing the divided ends together, and ensuring their
adhesion, and thereby shortening the muscles, and giving them
artificially that tone or tension, the want of which I considered was
the great cause of the continuance of the paralysis. It therefore
appears to me, that during the hypnotic state there is a complete
inversion of the ordinary condition, and that the force of the
ganglionic system becomes predominant, instead of being, as in the
ordinary condition, only subordinate.
Another argument in favour of this view is the well known fact, that
all voluntary motion, or reflex muscular action, speedily exhausts the
powers, and renders the subject unable to continue such efforts, and
fatigued in consequence of them. Voluntary effort also is strongest
at first, and gradually becomes weaker. The functions of the
organic system of nerves, on the contrary, are more equable and
persistent in their nature; and, although they may be influenced in
some degree as to the activity of their functions, by directing
attention in a particular manner, - as the secretion of saliva by
thinking of food, the secretion of milk by the nurse thinking of her
child, &c. &c., still they cannot be said to be under
voluntary control in the same direct manner and degree as muscular
motion. The cataleptiform state induced by Hypnotism comes on
gradually. For some time voluntary power predominates; but at length
the involuntary rigidity, or organic tonicity gains the ascendency;
and, although persisted in for a great length of time, is followed by
no exhaustion or fatigue, on the contrary, so far as I have carried
the experiments, the whole functions seem to be invigorated by the
continuance of this condition.]
In conclusion, I beg leave to remark, that the varieties which are
met with as regards susceptibility to the hypnotic impression, and the
mode and degrees of its action, are only analogous to what we
experience in respect to the effects of wine, spirits, opium, the
nitrous oxide, and many other agents. They are all well known to act
differently on different individuals, and even on the same individuals
at different times, according to the condition of the system; but who
calls in question the reality of their effects merely because of that
want of uniformity of action?
top
Part II
Having in the former part so far explained the mode of inducing the
phenomena, I now proceed to detail the cases in which I have
successfully applied this process in the cure of disease. I shall
endeavour to explain my modes of operating in different affections, so
as to enable others to apply with advantage in their practice, what I
have found so eminently useful in my own.
When the artificial state of somnolence his been induced in the
manner already pointed out, pp. 27-29, the manipulations must be
varied according to the peculiar object we have in view. If the force
of the circulation in a limb is wished to be diminished, and the sensibility
also to be reduced, call the muscles of that member into
activity, leaving the other extremities limber. On the other hand, if
the force of the circulation and sensibility are wished to be increased
in a limb, keep it limber, and call the others
into activity, by elevating and extending them, and the desired result
will follow. If general depression is wanted, after one or two
limbs have been extended for a short time, cautiously reduce them, and
leave the whole body limber and quiet. If general excitement
of the system is wanted, extend the whole limbs, causing the
patient to call the muscles into strong action, and very speedily they
will become rigidly fixed, and the force and frequency of the heart's
action, and determination to the brain, as evinced by the action of
the carotids, distended jugulars, flushed face, and injected eyes,
will speedily become apparent. By applying the ear over the region of
the heart, it will be apparent that the force and frequency of the
heart's action becomes prodigiously increased in a very short time
after extending the limbs. It will also be found, they may be very
speedily altered and brought down by reducing the rigidity of the
limbs. The difference of rise in the pulse when extending the limbs
during hypnotism, from what happens in the natural state, is
one of the strongest proofs of the patient being in the hypnotic
condition.
It has appeared to me, that we have thus the power of subjecting the
brain and spinal cord, and whole ganglionic system, to a high state of
excitement, as the pulse may speedily be raised to double its natural
velocity, in most cases, and still more speedily reduced to the
natural standard again. Its volume and tension may also be equally
rapidly increased or diminished. It is therefore naturally to be
expected, that the functions must be greatly influenced by such
transitions. Every medical man knows that chronic nervous disorders of
the most painful nature may have resisted every known remedy for
weeks, or months, or years, but have speedily vanished on the
accession of some acute attack. Now, my views were, in such cases, to
induce an intense state of excitement for a short time, to be
terminated abruptly, with the hope of changing the former action, and
thus terminating the disorder; and assuredly, in many instances the
most obstinate chronic functional disorder is gone, or greatly
meliorated, by a few such operations.
Then, again, by keeping any particular organ awake or active, whilst
the others were asleep, I considered there would be a great increase
of activity induced, by the whole nervous energy, or sensorial power,
being directed to that point; or by keeping all the other organs
active, whilst one which had been too active was allowed to remain, in
the torpid state, that inordinate activity would be reduced in
intensity, and that probably permanently, - that the inordinate
stimulus, in one case, would remove the susceptibility to lower
impressions, which were frequently exciting, or habitually keeping up
morbid feeling or action; and in the other cases, that by suspending
the morbid sensibility of a part for a time, and rousing antagonist
functions, such condition might be permanently improved.
Whether I have been right or wrong in my theoretical views, there
can be no doubt of the fact that in many instances I have been
successful in the application of Hypnotism as a curative agent; and
the beneficial results of the operations have been so immediate and
decided, as to leave no doubt that they stand in the relation of cause
and effect. However, that much of the success depends on the
impression arising from the altered condition of circulation, seems to
me to be proved by the fact, that in cases where the sleep was induced
without the rise in the force and frequency in the
heart's action, by insuring this condition, the beneficial result
has instantly followed, where there has been no previous improvement
with the low pulse. The following is a remarkable instance of
this: - Nodan, deaf mute, twenty-four years of age, was considered
never to have heard sound excepting the report of a gun or thunder,
when there was succussion of the air sufficient to induce feeling
rather than hearing, properly so called. The mother told me Mr
Vaughan, head master of the Deaf and Dumb Institution when Nolan was
at school, considered any indication of hearing
referred to was feeling, and not hearing, properly so
called. At the first operation there was very little rise of pulse,
and afterwards I could not discern he had any sense of hearing
whatever. At next trial the pulse was excited, and so remarkable was
the effect, that in going home he was so much annoyed with the noise
of the carts and carriages, that he would not allow himself to be
operated on again for some time. He has only been operated on a few
times, and the result is, that although he lives in a back street, he
can now hear a band of music coming along the front street,
and will run out to meet it.
I shall first illustrate the efficacy of hypnotism on the various
senses, and also on the mental condition. And first, of sight. The
mode of operating in chronic cases, is first to induce the sleep, then
extend the extremities, and keep the eyes from getting into the torpid
state, by fanning them, or passing a current of air over them
occasionally. The length of time required to keep such patient in this
condition may vary from six to twelve minutes, according to the state
of the circulation. The following cases will illustrate the affections
of the eyes in which I have applied this mode of treatment with
advantage.
Case I, Mrs Roiley applied to me on the 6th April, 1842. She stated
she was 54 years of age; that for the last sixteen years she had been
a great sufferer from an affection of the head, attended with pain in
the eyes and weakness of sight; that it was now become so bad, that
she could not continue to read for more than a few minutes at a time,
even with the aid of glasses. She had undergone the most active
treatment under first rate medical men, including bleeding general and
local, blistering - on one occasion, she was twice bled with leeches,
and had five blisters to her head in one month - and almost every
variety of internal medicine which could be suggested for such a case;
but still without improving her sight. For years she had required to
have her head shaved every few weeks, and cold affusions and
spirituous lotions frequently applied to it, to reduce the excessive
heat and other uncomfortable feelings. The skin of the palms of the
hands was so hard, dry, and irritable, as to render it liable to chap
whenever she attempted to open the hands fully. The pain during the
day, and general irritability, had rendered it necessary for her to
take a composing pill three times in twenty-four hours, for some time;
still her rest was so bad as to force her to rise and walk about the
room several times during the night; and her memory had become so much
impaired, that she often required to go up stairs and then down again
several times before she could remember what she went up for. About
three years before consulting me, she had a paralytic attack, which
deprived her of power of the muscles of the right side of the face for
a few days. Such had been the general state of her health before
consulting me, and the state of her sight, and the result of
my operation will be understood by the following document, which is
attested by herself and others, who were present when I first operated
on her: -
"Mrs Roiley, (aged 54,) Chapel Street, Salford, formerly of
South Windsor Street, Toxteth Park, Liverpool, as Miss Robinson, (four
years ago,) has been gradually losing sight since thirty-eight years
of age. Called on me for the first time, 6th April, 1842. Could not
read the heading of the newspaper, excepting the words, 'Macclesfield
Courier;' after being hypnotized for eight minutes, she could
distinctly read 'and Herald,' and in a few minutes more the whole of
the smaller line, 'Congleton Gazette, Stockport Express, and Cheshire
Advertiser,' also the day, month, and date of the paper. That the
above is a correct report, is attested by the patient herself and
other three patients, who were present the whole time. (Signed) ALICE
ROILEY.
M. A. STOWIE.
ANN STOWIE.
HENRY GAGGS."
When Mrs Roiley called on me two days after, she gave me the
following report. After leaving my house on the 6th, she was much
gratified to find her sight so much improved, which induced her to go
and test it by looking it articles displayed in shop windows, and in
particular remarked that she had walked up to Mr Agnew's shop window,
and was able to see distinctly the features of a portrait of Sir
Robert Peel, and to read under it, "Sir Robert Peel, Bart.,"
without her glasses, neither of which she could have done for long
before. She also stated, that after being at home, she took up the
small diamond Polyglot Bible, and with the aid of her glasses, was
agreeably surprised to find she was enabled to read the 118th Psalm,
(29 verses,) although this had been, as she expressed it, a sealed
book to her for years. The following is the report which was recorded
and attested by her on the 12th April, 1842: - "Mrs Roiley was
able to read a Psalm with the aid of her glasses in the smallest sized
Polyglot Bible same afternoon she was first hypnotized. Two days
after, (8th April,) was hypnotized a second time. Next day, made a net
handkerchief with the aid of her glasses. April 12, has gone on
improving, and in my own presence and several others, with the aid of
her glasses, read the Polyglot Bible with ease and correctness, which
she said, had been a sealed book to her for years before I operated on
her. (Signed) ALICE ROILEY.
M. A. STOWIE.
Wm. HALLDAY."
It is gratifying to be able to add, that the improvement of the
sight has been permanent; and not only so, but that the whole painful
catalogue of complaints with which she had been afflicted speedily
disappeared, namely, pain of the chest, head, and eyes, loss of
memory, disturbed sleep, irregularity of the secreting and digestive
functions, and instead of the arid skin, regular action of it, so that
the palms of the hands, which were so harsh and arid that she could
not extend them without lacerating the skin, causing great pain and
annoyance, were very soon as soft as a piece of chamois leather.
[Footnote: Very lately, a lady about 25 years of age was hypnotized by
me. On being roused, she expressed her surprise to find her hands
bathed in perspiration, as she observed she was never known to
have the slightest moisture on her hands till that moment.] The
whole of this improvement was accomplished entirely by this agency, as
she had no medicine whatever during her attendance on me; nor has she
required any up to this date, 20th February, 1843, when I read this
report to her, and when she remarked it was much under drawn;
that with great truth I might have represented her as having been a
greater sufferer.
Mrs Roiley is a very intelligent person, and one whose Christian
profession and principles place her statements above all suspicion.
She has been seen by many eminent professional and scientific
gentlemen, who can bear testimony that they have had from her own lips
the same statements as I have recorded above.
It appears to me that it would be impossible to adduce a more
striking proof than this case affords, of the great and undoubted
benefit resulting from the application of any remedial measure. The
improvement was so remarkable, as to admit of no doubt as to its
reality, and so immediate after the hypnotizing, as to prove they
stood in the relation of cause and effect, no other remedy being in
operation; and whatever may be supposed capable of being achieved
through the mere power of imagination, as regards certain functions,
the sense of sight could scarcely be supposed capable of being
so much meliorated directly through that influence.
CaseII. is that of Mrs M. A. Stowe. This lady was present when I
first operated on Mrs Roiley, and was so much gratified by the effects
she witnessed in that case, as to induce her to consult me as to the
state of her own eyes, and the probability of benefiting them by a
similar operation. Mrs. Stowe was 44 years of age, and had experienced
such weakness of sight as to require the aid of glasses for the last
twenty-two years, to enable her to sew, read, or write, and, for some
years past, she required them to enable her to transact her most
ordinary household duties. The following is the statement of her
condition, which I noted at the time, and is attested by her own
signature, and that of others then present:- Mrs. Stowe, aged 44, 1,
Bank Place, Red Bank, Manchester, his been troubled with weakness of
sight for twenty-two years, so as to require glasses to enable her to
read or sew. When tested to-day, 8th April, 1842, without her glasses,
could not distinguish the large (capital) letters of advertisements in
a news-paper, nor large heading of the paper. After being hypnotized
for eight minutes, she could distinctly read both the large and small
heading, and day, month, and date of the paper.
(Signed) M. A. STOWE.
She has also been able to sign her name to attest the accuracy of
the above statement, before her daughter, and another patient.
(Signed) ANN STOWE.
10th, Called on me, and informed me she had been able to make
herself a blonde cap, and to thread her needle without
spectacles, [Footnote: I have myself seen her thread a No. 8 needle on
several occasions.] which she could not do before for twenty-two
years. 12th, Continued improving; told one she had been able to write
up her accounts without glasses.
(Signed) STOWE.
Wm. HALLIDAY.
ALICE ROILEY.
ANN STOWE.
This patient has retained the improvement of her sight. She has also
informed me, that she was agreeably surprised, after she left my
house, the first day she was operated on, to find, as
she went along the streets, that she could read the sign-boards,
which she could not do for years before. She has also named to many
others, as well as myself, a very convincing proof of her great
improvement in this respect. Before being operated on by me, on the
8th April, 1842, if she went a-shopping, without her glasses,
she was sure to make some mistake as to the quality of goods
purchased, and have the trouble of going back to have them exchanged,
but now she never requires to take her glasses with her, as can be
testified by the shop-men where she makes her purchases. Her memory
and general health have also been greatly improved by the same
operations.
Case III. Miss Stowe, daughter of the former patient, 22 years of
age, "was under the necessity of reading, and doing any
particular work, with the aid of glasses, for the last two years, but
has never required them since she was first hypnotized, and can now
read the small Polyglot Bible." This is attested by her mother,
herself, and Mr William Halliday, and Mrs Roiley.
The improvement has been permanent, and she has threaded a No. 12
needle in my presence, eight months after I first operated on her.
Case IV Mr J. A. Walker, 22 years of age, had always had very weak
sight, but since being hypnotized has been greatly improved in his
sight, as well as in his memory and general health.
Case V. Mrs C., aged 83, had, from her age, required the use of
glasses for many years, to enable her to sew or read. Last August I
hypnotized her for deafness, with very decided advantage, and I told
her I also expected to improve her sight at the same time. She was
very incredulous, but was agreeably surprised to find, that after a
second operation she was not only able to hear much
better, but also to sew some flannel, threading her needle without
her glasses. She had been thus occupied for several hours, when I
called to see her, after the second operation.
There have been cases in which I have tried this method without
success, but this proves only that we must never expect to obtain
possession of a universal remedy. Cases of confirmed amaurosis, which
had resisted every other known remedy, and which were only undertaken
by me at the desire of the patients, and sometimes of medical men
also, as a forlorn hope, have, as in most cases was suspected might be
the result, proved unsuccessful, and, through these, attempts have
been most ungenerously and unwarrantably made to throw discredit on
the power of hypnotism altogether. It has proved successful in too
many instances, however, to be borne down by such paltry and pitiful
misrepresentation. I could easily adduce many more successful cases,
did I deem it necessary, but shall only give two more.
Case V Mr J-- has always had imperfect vision, is near-sighted, has
strabismus of right eye, and the sight so dull, that it was with great
difficulty he could, without glasses, see the large letters (on white
paper) in the title page of the "Medical Gazette." After the
first operation he could see better, and after it had been repeated a
few times he could, without glasses, read a few words of the leading
article of that work, and after a few more operations, could read the
type in which the lectures, at the beginning of the work, are printed.
Case VI. Mrs S., one of my own near relatives, had a severe
rheumatic fever in January, 1839. During the course of this disease
the left eye became implicated, involving both the internal and
external structures of the organ. She had the benefit of the advice of
one of the first-rate oculists in Edinburgh. She was under his care
till the August following, when he considered farther attendance
unnecessary, but gave such instructions as he deemed expedient for her
future management of it, and which had been duly attended to till the
period when I first saw her, in June, 1842. At that time she came on a
visit to my house. The eye was free from pain, but was of no service
as an organ of vision. There was an opacity over more than one half of
the cornea, sufficient to prevent distinct perception of any object
placed opposite the temporal half of the eye, all being seen through a
dense haze; and objects placed towards the opposite side were seen
very imperfectly, owing to the injury the choroid and retina had
sustained in the points on which the images of such objects were
reflected. The opacity of the cornea was not only an obstacle to
distinct vision, but was also a source of annoyance, from its
disfigurement, being obvious even to those at a considerable distance.
Notwithstanding the great advantage I had seen other patients,
afflicted with affection of the eyes, derive from hypnotism, it never
occurred to me that such a case as that of Mrs S. was likely to be
benefited by such an operation. I had, however, recommended it to her
for a severe rheumatic affection of the right shoulder and arm. She
had been in my house about three months before she could make up her
mind to undergo the operation, but at length, the violence of the pain
impelled her to try it, or any thing else I should recommend. I of
course hypnotized her, which immediately relieved her pain so much,
that after the first operation, she could move the arm freely. The
operation was repeated the following day, with complete relief as
regarded the arm; and to the surprise and delight of the patient,
myself, and others present, she found her sight so much
improved as to be able to see every thing in the room, and to name
different flowers, and distinguish their colours, whilst the right eye
was shut, which she had not been able to do for more than three years
and a half previously. I consequently now repeated the operation
daily, and, in a very short time, had the satisfaction of seeing the
cornea so transparent, that it requires close inspection to observe
where tiny opacity remains. Neither external nor internal means were
used during this improvement, nothing but the hypnotizing was had
recourse to; and during the three months I had an opportunity of
watching it prior to these operations, there was no visible change in
the condition of the organ. I should observe, that after the first
operation, there was considerable smarting in the eye, which continued
all night, and, in a less degree, after future operations, which, no
doubt, roused the absorbents, and effected the removal of the opacity
of the cornea. Stimulating the optic nerve to greater activity,
however, must have been the chief cause of the very rapid improvement,
which enabled her to see objects after second operation. I should
remark, that the sight, with regard to objects seen from the temporal
side of the eye, is much more distinct than from the nasal side, owing
to the retina and choroid having sustained irreparable damage during
the inflammatory stage at the commencement of the attack in 1839.
Case VII. Mr Holditch, 39 years of age, had been partially paralytic
for ten years, which came on some time after a fall. Shortly after the
fall, he experienced an attack of double vision, which went off after
bleeding, blistering, and the usual treatment, but was followed by
paralysis of the lower limbs, which induced him to consult me on the
18th February, 1843. See Case XXVII. p. 217. He was very much
surprised, when I told him he had defective vision of the right eye,
said he was not aware of it, and would not believe that I was not
mistaken, till I tested him, when he found he could barely see the
capitals of the words, "Medical Gazette," as heading of the
leading article of that work, whilst he could read the ordinary size
print of the page with the other eye. After being hypnotized, I tested
him in the same position, and with the same degree of light, and he
could then read the same sized print with it, and it has
continued so ever since. He could also walk across the room without
crutch or stick, which he could not do before, at which he was very
much surprised, as he was quite conscious the whole time, and
therefore could not believe any good could have resulted to him from
what as done, till he had the positive evidence of it in being able to
see and walk.
Here, then, we have seen three cases of improved vision consequent
on hypnotizing for other affections, and where, consequently, the
improvement could not at all be attributable to imagination, but to
the altered condition in the capillary circulation and distribution of
the vis nervosa.
In cases of active inflammation of the eyes, either external or
internal, I have never tried hypnotism. By the mode calculated to
excite the circulation, of course it would be quite inadmissible; and
it could only be speculation for me to hazard an opinion as to its
probable result by the other mode.
The extraordinary excitement of the auditory organ, which I had
observed in the course of my early experiments, and the fact that
hearing was the last sense to disappear during this artificial sleep,
(unless we except that of the sensibility to a current of air,) led me
to anticipate most satisfactory results from this process in the
treatment of deafness, arising from torpor of the auditory nerves. I
consequently tried it in such eases, and where there has not been
destruction, or irreparable organic injury to the auditory apparatus,
I can confidently say, I know of no means equal to hypnotism, for
benefiting such cases. Of course, it cannot suit all cases,
but I am satisfied it will succeed in a numerous class of cases, and
in some which bid defiance to all other known modes of treatment.
I am enabled to state this confidently, not only from my own
personal success, but also from that of others who have fairly tried
it. One professional friend, Mr Gardom, introduced to me two patients
whom he had improved so much by hypnotism only, that they were enabled
to hear the sermons of their respective pastors, which they could not
do before, in consequence of which one of them had to leave her
favourite minister, and go to another church; but, after being
hypnotized, has been able to hear so much better, that she has been
thus induced to return to her former pastor.
The great success which I had experienced from hypnotism, in
improving those who were deaf through disease, led me to hope it might
be of service to some of those who were born deaf and dumb, and I
therefore tried it in such cases with a considerable degree o success,
ultimately with a success beyond my most sanguine expectations. In
consequence of what had been done and exhibited at my lectures, the
medical profession of Liverpool, to their credit be it recorded,
recommended to the governors of the Deaf and Dumb Institution there,
to permit in experimental trial to be made at their Institution. The
governors refused their assent to this within the walls of the
Institution, but agreed to permit a trial to be made with such
out-door pupils as could be induced to submit to it elsewhere, the
consent of the parents having been obtained. In consequence of this, a
committee of the governors and the medical faculty was appointed to
superintend the said investigation, and I was invited to go over and
conduct the experiments in their presence, and it was proposed a
report of the results should be published in the Medical Journals, at
the termination of our labours. The difficulty of getting the pupils
and their parents to attend, induced us to abandon the proceedings
after two trials had been made, so that it would be quite inconsistent
with the conditions stipulated, at the commencement of said
investigation, to publish any report of the result of this partial
investigation. However, I think I cannot better illustrate the extent
of my expectations, in reference to such cases, than by transcribing
an extract from my address to the said committee, prior to commencing
our experimental trial.
"Hitherto, these patients have been considered beyond the pale
of human aid, so decidedly have they resisted all means tried for
their relief; and the morbid condition of the organs, as ascertained
by dissection, was sufficient to warrant the inference that it was
improbable any remedy could ever be discovered for such cases.
Fully aware of this pathological difficulty, I was nevertheless
inclined to try the effect of neuro-hypnotism with congenital deaf
mutes, knowing it could be done with perfect safety, and without pain
or inconvenience to the patients. Moreover, from having witnessed its
extraordinary power of rousing the excitability of the auditory
nerves, I entertained the hope that it might thus be capable of
exciting some degree of hearing, from the increased
sensibility of the nerves compensating for the imperfection of the
organ. I was not, and am not even now, so visionary, as to expect perfection
of function, when there is great imperfection of the organ.
Perfection of organization and function must be co-existent; at least
the function cannot be perfectly performed when the
organization is much impaired. The result of my first trial
was beyond my most sanguine expectations, which induced me to
persevere, and the result his been, that I have scarcely met with a
case of congenital deaf mute, where I have not succeeded in making the
patient hear in some degree. Many may never hear so well as to make it
available to holding conversation by its aid; but still it is most
interesting in a physiological point of view, to know the fact, that
by this means the imperfect organ can be roused to any degree
of sensibility to sound, as even this must tend to the improvement of
the general functions of the brain, rather than being entirely
deprived of one source of its appropriate stimuli. I have no doubt,
moreover, that many cases will, by this means, be restored to such
degree of hearing as will be available for colloquial intercourse in
society, which never could have been accomplished by any other means
hitherto tried. If my success with the cases assembled here is at all
equal to what it has been with others elsewhere, I think it cannot be
otherwise than gratifying to you to find that our art has acquired a
new and important power in this agency. I must not, however, omit to
add, that many cases may shew no improvement at a first or second
trial, and yet be very satisfactory after a few trials. According
to my experience, there is much greater chance of benefiting congenital
deaf mutes, than those who have become so from disease or accident,
to the extent of total toss of hearing.
"In testing patients as to their power of hearing, I consider
it quite necessary to adopt a different plan for those who are congenital
deaf mutes, from what we do with those who have known what perfect
hearing was at some former period of their lives. It is quite true
that the latter class may be unable to hear a musical BookNeurypnology.html, or the tick
of a watch, when held at a little distance from the ears, but can hear
it when pressed against the ear, or the mastoid process, or
greater conducting power of the bony structure. There are patients of
this class, however, who declare they have no sense of sound when so
tested, because their previous knowledge of the sense enables them to
distinguish betwixt hearing, properly so called, and common
feeling. In testing congenital deaf mutes, from their want
of this previous knowledge, they will all signify they hear, if any
sonorous or vibrating body is pressed against the ear. This, however,
I do not consider we have any proof of being hearing, but feeling;
because they had no previous knowledge to direct them as to the
peculiar sensation of correct hearing; and they will give the
same indication if the sonorous body is placed on any other solid part
of the body, according to its respective degree of sensibility. In
applying tests to congenital deaf mutes, therefore, I consider
they have no sense of hearing, if they cannot hear the sound of a
musical BookNeurypnology.html held close to, but not touching the ears,
or any other sonorous body whose vibrations do not excite such
oscillation in the air as is sufficient to be recognized by common
feeling. It ought also to be borne in mind that the common
feeling of the deaf and blind is generally much more acute than in
those who have not been deprived of those senses. At all events we
cannot err in taking this as our, standard, because, if those who did
not hear on the application of such a test before the
operation, do not hear it also after the operation, we shall
consider there is no improvement; and if those who hear it at a
certain distance before the operation, cannot after
the operation hear it at a greater distance, it must also be
considered no improvement has been made. But if the former can, after
the operation, hear without the BookNeurypnology.html touching the ear,
and the latter can hear at a greater distance, then of course
we are entitled to say an improvement has resulted from the operation."
These extracts should be sufficient to explain what the extent of my
expectations were as to meliorating the condition of congenital
deaf and dumb patients, the principles upon which these
expectations were based, and my mode of testing the original and
subsequent condition of such patients. The following cases will prove
that my anticipations have been so far realized in one case to an
extent I never calculated on. The mode of operating is, hypnotize the
patient, extend the limbs, and gently fan the ears.
Case VIII. The case of Nodan has already been referred to at page
l64, and I shall therefore merely add here, that he was 24 years old,
was never considered to have had the power of hearing, properly so
called, according to the opinion of the head master of the Deaf and
Dumb Institution, where he was a pupil; that after the first
operation I satisfied myself he had no sense of hearing,
but after the second, which I carried still farther, he could
hear, and was so annoyed by the noise of the carts and carriages when
going home, after that operation, that he could not be induced to call
on me again for some time. He has been operated on only a few times,
and has been so much improved, that although he lives in aback street,
he can now hear a band of music coming along the front street, and
will go out to meet it. I lately tested him, and found he could hear
in his room on the second floor a gentle knock on the bottom stair.
His improvement, therefore, has been both decided and permanent, and
is entirely attributable to hypnotism, as no other means were adopted
in his case.
Case IX. "Mr John Wright, Pendleton, 19 years of age.
Congenital deaf mute. Was four years at the asylum under Mr Vaughan.
Never heard sound. On testing, could not discern the tick of a watch
pressed against the ears, nor a musical BookNeurypnology.html, unless when pressed
against the ears, which was evidently feeling, and not hearing,
its he evinced the same expressions when it was applied to the
shoulder, chest, or back of the hand. After being hypnotized for eight
minutes, he could hear the musical BookNeurypnology.html held more than an inch from
the left ear, but not at all with the right, if not
pressed against it, which was of course only feeling. Certified as
correct by the father of the patient.
(Signed) JOHN WRIGHT."
" MANCHESTER, 8th April, 1842."
" After writing the above statement, he was again tested, and
could hear the BookNeurypnology.html half an inch from the right ear. (Signed)
JOHN WRIGHT."
The latter fact, of hearing better after being roused than at the
very moment they are roused, occurs in cases generally. This patient
attended daily for a short time, and made considerable progress in the
power of hearing, but like too many others he had not patience to
persevere, which his father, who is a very respectable and intelligent
man, wished him to do. Unfortunately the deaf and dumb are not aware
of the extent of their privation, or of the real advantage
they would obtain by persevering, and their expectation, and that of
their friends, in most cases seems to be, that the moment they have
the power of hearing restored in some degree, they should, as
by a miracle, also be immediately inspired with the gift of tongues,
and be able to speak and understand language without study, toil, or
trouble. This has been so well expressed by John Harrison Curtis, Esq.
that I shall quote a paragraph from his pen on the subject.
"Kramer condemns the cases recorded as cures by Itard, Deleau,
and others, because, when published, the patients had not acquired a
facility of speech equal to that evinced by other people of the same
age; forgetting, that when the deafness his been cured, the individual
is placed precisely in the position of a child that has to acquire the
faculty of speech, and not infrequently the power of thought; while,
at the same time, if he have approached the age of puberty, he has to
contend with false impressions created by the erroneous perceptions
which affected him while unable, from his infirmity, to impart his
feelings and ideas to his fellow-creatures; in fact, he is placed in
the same position in regard to hearing as Cheselden's patient was with
respect to vision. The organ, when the cophosis is removed, requires
to be carefully educated to perceive, understand, and distinguish the
variety of sounds which will impinge upon the auditory nerve, a task
requiring much time for its accomplishment. The cure of congenital
deafness, consequently, may be effected, and yet rendered efféte,
for want of this necessary subsequent education."
After remarking that many cases of deaf dumbness arise from disease,
and are only partially deaf, he added, "Many of these cases admit
of amelioration, some of cure; and I hold, that wherever there is a
chance only of doing good, it ought not to be neglected; it may
certainly raise hopes which may be nullified hereafter, but not in the
patient, who cannot comprehend the motives of the proceeding; nor
would the friends be much annoyed thereat, if the surgeon has
performed his duty properly, by shewing, that although there is a
chance of success, it is after all only a chance." - "It
does not occasion a loss of valuable time, worthy to be put in
competition with the prospect of restoring even one individual to the
enjoyment of the society and converse of his fellows." - "Many
would be rendered (by proper treatment) useful members of society,
who, under the present system, remain hopeless objects of
commiseration as long as they live," Mr Curtis farther adds, "
I perfectly agree with Dr Willams, who says, a cure ought always to be
attempted, and that at the earliest moment at which deafness is
detected; and children so affected should mix with others not deaf,
and no symbolical education should take place until all chances of
cure are gone." Medical Gazette, 23d September,1842.
These remarks are so judicious and important as to require no
comment by way of enforcing them on any intelligent and candid reader.
The following case having been the cause of much controversy I shall
give it in detail. Before operating on the boy, in the presence of the
gentleman who brought him to me, I asked the lad, in writing, if he
ever heard, to which he returned answer, (also in writing,) "No."
I then proceeded to operate on him, and the following is a report of
his ease from my note-book.
Case X. "James Sheldmerdine, Mr Barker's, 83 High Street,
Manchester, aged fourteen years and a half, was born deaf and dumb,
and educated at the Manchester Deaf and Dumb Asylum, and came out last
June, in consequence of his age. 4th January, 1842, I subjected him to
the mesmeric influence, by causing him look at my glass rod, and in
thirteen minutes aroused him by a clap of the hands, when he could
hear the tick of my watch applied to the right ear, but only very
slightly so when applied to the left. Could hear me speak loudly, but
could not tell what I said to him. This took place in presence of his
master, who brought him to me, and now attests the correctness of the
above. The boy has other two brothers deaf and dumb.
( Signed) MATTHEW BARKER." [Footnote: Mr Barker was not
the boy's master, but employed some of his friends, as was afterwards
explained to me. ]
5th January. Again subjected him to the operation. In twelve minutes
he could hear my watch at nine inches from right ear, and at six from
left.
7th January. Called upon me, and could hear with the right ear at
four and a half inches, and one inch from left ear. After being
hypnotized for ten minutes, he could hear the watch at seven inches
from right, and at four inches from left ear. 17th January. After
operation could hear six and a half inches with left, and
seven and a half with right. 20th. Could, after being roused,
hear my watch at seven and a half inches from left ear, and at
nine inches from right."
The boy was now tested by competent judges, and pronounced capable
of imitating articulate sound without seeing the motion of the
lips. To render this the more certain he was tried with a word
requiring no motion of the lips and spoken near his ear, which he
distinctly imitated.
I now commenced to teach him to speak a few simple words which he
got on very well; and that he could do so very satisfactorily, I
considered there was ample proof by what he accomplished at my
lectures. There were some who could not believe he could have been
born entirely deaf and dumb, when they heard how well he imitated
articulate sounds when the motions of the lips were concealed. This
was particularly and warmly disputed at a lecture I gave at Liverpool,
on the 1st of April, 1842. The boy was asked, without my knowledge, by
Mr Rhind, head master of the Deaf and Dumb Institution of Liverpool,
if he ever heard before being operated on by me, to which he answered,
"No." Next day, in the presence of several friends, I again
questioned him in writing as to his original condition, when he gave
the following answers, which he certified by his signature as being
correct. Fortunately, this document, by the merest accident, (having
been written on the back of a letter belonging to another gentleman,)
has been preserved, and I shall here transcribe it verbatim. "'Could
you ever hear before I operated on you?'- 'No,' 'How did the master of
the school teach you to say, papa, mamma?' - 'Few days.' 'How
did he do it?' - 'Ba, be, bi, bo, bu.' 'Did the master ask you to
watch the motions of his lips?' -' Yes.' 'Did he try to teach you to
speak by applying his mouth to your ear?' - 'No.' 'Did you ever say
what you did to me before?' - 'No.' 'Did you ever read it, so far as
you remember?'-' No.'
(Signed) JAMES SHELMERDINE."
Hitherto the boy and only been taught single words The last two
questions refer to part of the "Lord's Prayer," in English
which I had been teaching him to speak by means of hearing;
and although he speedily made a good attempt at repeating part of it,
the effect was so different from that of the mode adopted at school,
or that conveyed to his mind through the organ of sight, when reading
it, as he must have been accustomed to do, that he did not know
what it was I had been teaching him to speak. Could a stronger
proof than this be adduced that the boy did not learn to speak by earing
before he was under my treatment?
I also, on the same day, taught this boy to repeat part of the
Lord's Prayer in Latin, to do away with all ground of cavil as to what
he might have learned it the Institution; and at my next
lecture at Liverpool, the week after, he was heard to be able to
repeat it when spoken to him in a moderate tone of voice whilst the
motions of the lips were concealed, and that taking the words in any
order, so that there ould be no ground of mistake as to his hearing
what he repeated.
Various surmises having now got out, that this boy, James
Shelmerdine, might have had, or must have had, the
sense of hearing originally, and that his present condition could not
possibly be the result of hypnotism, I addressed a letter to Mr
Bingham, who was head master of the Asylum during the five years this
boy was at school, requesting him to favour me with information as to
James Shelmerdine's real condition up to the time when he left school.
The following is his reply, and I may add, I am not personally
acquainted with Mr Bingham. After describing the partial hearing of
this boy, which varied greatly, Mr Bingham adds, - "I never
considered his hearing sufficient to distinguish one sound from
another in conversation, and consequently, never attempted to teach
him to speak in any other way than that which I use with all children
born deaf. If hypnotism, or mesmerism, has enabled him to imitate the
sounds you wished to communicate to him without his observing the
lips, I do not hesitate to say that you have achieved that which I
never could have expected; and, under such circumstances, I think
every encouragement ought to be given to yout plan, You would greatly
oblige me by saying if this has been accomplished, as the boy was
quite incapable of distinguishing one word from another when he left
me, if spoken behind his back."
Fortunately I had no difficulty in satisfactorily substantiating
this, for, besides having been so repeatedly proved in the public
lecture-room, here and elsewhere he had also been tested before a
number of the must distinguished members of the British Association
last June, and, more recently, before a dozen witnesses, including the
present head master of the Deaf and Dumb Institution of this town. I
instituted this investigation in consequence of some gross attempts
which had been made to misrepresent my conduct in reference to this
case. The following is an extract from the report of his condition on
the 25th July last, (1842,) and is attested by Mr A. Patterson, head
master of our Deaf and Dumb School, and twelve more witnesses; - "James
Shelmerdine was examined at Mr Braid's before the undersigned, in
reference to his hearing, and he readily repeated part of the Lord's
Prayer, both in English and Latin, both backwards and forwards, after
Mr Braid repeating the words in a moderate tone of voice, without
being able to see the movement of the lips."
I had not seen the boy for about a month before this investigation,
and I would ask, did he not here manifest a decided improvement from
the state he was in when be left school, when, as borne testimony to
by Mr Bingham, "he was quite incapable of distinguishing one word
from another," if spoken so that he could not see the motion of
the lips? and I am quite certain this was his condition immediately
after the first operation. As has been already stated, he could
not then distinguish one word from another, however loudly spoken
close to his ear.
After communicating these statements of what the Boy could do, as
recorded at the investigation on the 25th July, Mr Bingham favoured me
with a second letter, from which I make the following extract: - "James
Shelmerdine's performance in repeating the Lord's Prayer, in Latin and
English, when the motions of the lips were concealed from him, is a
convincing proof that he must have benefited greatly by it
(hypnotism,) as he could not distinguish one sound from another by
oral communication."
The following fact also proves the great improvement in the boy's
hearing. One afternoon he was in my hall, when a lady was playing the
piano, and singing, in a room up stairs. He seemed so much pleased
with the music that I gave him permission to go and hear it. He
instantly went up stairs, and into the drawing-room by himself, and
seemed quite delighted with the sound of the music, as several who saw
him can testify. This, I am quite certain, he could not have done for
some time after he came under my care.
In fine, I feel confident, that had this boy persevered with the
operations and been taken pains with by his parents, to teach him to
speak, and understand the meaning of what he spoke, he would, long ere
now, have been able to hold oral communication with others with less
trouble, and in a more moderate tone of voice than we must resort to
with many whom we
meet with, who have become hard of hearing from age or disease. It
is, however, so much more trouble, at first, for the friends to teach
them language, than to hold intercourse with them by signs, that they
will not bestow it, and the patients, from not knowing the extent of
their privation, can be less expected to exert themselves for
acquiring the good they know not; and therefore, I feel assured there
will never be much achieved for the poor in this way, unless
within the walls of some public institution; but, that there are many
who might be permanently benefited in such situations I have no doubt.
In the paper by Mr Curtis, to which I have already referred, he writes
thus in reference to the pathological condition of the organ in those
born deaf and dumb: - "I am of the same opinion as Itard in this
respect, that structural disease does not occasion more than one case
in five, leaving, consequently, many cases in which medical assistance
may prove of service; and I do not acknowledge that the 'weakness of
the nerve, approaching to paralysis, or an actual paralysis of the
nerve,' which Dr Kramer assumes to exist in those cases where
congenital cophosis is present, and no structural derangement, must
necessarily be as incurable as structural deficiency. We are not apt
to abandon incipient palsy of a verve of sense or motion, in other
parts of the system, without an attempt at relief; and I see no reason
why the unfortunate being afflicted with deaf dumbness, should be
surrendered to his fate, without a well directed attempt being
previously made to redeem him therefrom." This, together with the
statement of his experience, ought to encourage farther trials, and
especially now that we have got a new and more powerful agent to
operate with than any hitherto brought into operation in such cases.
The results of the following case have far more than realized my most
sanguine expectations. It clearly proves, that persons with perfect
organization may have been deaf and dumb from birth, and continue so
merely for want of a sufficient stimulus to set the machinery in
motion.
In consequence of the remarkable improvement; if hearing, through
hypnotism, evinced in the case of Mrs. C., (Case IV. already
recorded,) I was asked to give my opinion as to the probability of a
similar operation benefiting a girl who had been deaf and dumb from
birth, and who was sister to a servant in the family I was then
visiting. I told them what my experience had been in respect to such
cases, and it was accordingly arranged that I should see the patient,
and try what could be done for her, the following day.
Case X. 9th August, 1843. The girl, Sara h Taylor, was nine and
a-half years of age, very small for her age, and very stupid looking.
The following is the history of the case, as stated by father, mother,
and elder sister. She was a seven months' child, remarkably small, the
head large for the size of the body, and soft, (" like a bladder
full of water,") and it was long before they expected to be able
to rear the child. As she grew up they were much annoyed with her not
speaking, and by her paying no attention to what was said to her. At
last they found that this was not obstinacy, to which it had been at
first attributed. They now came to the painful conviction that she was
deaf and dumb. The father has assured myself, and many others, that in
his anxiety to obtain proof of her having any degree of hearing, he
has "often stood behind her, and shouted (as he expressed
himself) till he was hoarse again," without her evincing any sign
of hearing; and that when she was out of sight they were in continual
terror she would be run over by carts or carriages, as she could not
hear their approach. The testimony of the mother and sister was to the
same effect, that they never could make her hear, or pay any attention
by calling her, when her back was towards them. In such position they
could only make her observe them by touching her. They all agree,
also, in stating, that she never could speak so as to be understood,
till after being operated on by me, excepting two or three words, -
father, mother, sister, which she had learned from watching the
motions of their lips. I regret not having had her tested by a musical
BookNeurypnology.html before I operated on her; but I am quite certain, that after the
first operation she could not distinguish one word from another; and I
afterwards had the best possible proof of her never having heard for
any useful purpose, as she was quite ignorant of the name of any
part of her own body, or of any person place, or thing, as
is well known to many who saw her after I had operated on her. After
the third and fourth operation I could manage to make her speak a few
simple words, and also to make a tolerable attempt at following me
when singing the musical scale.
Ten days after the fourth trial, she was tested and proved able to
do this before fifty or sixty highly respectable witnesses, including
many professional gentlemen. For months past she has been attending
the Scotch Session School, and is making very good progress in
learning, and I have no doubt, will prove to be a clever girl; she
hears so correctly now, as not only to be able to imitate speaking,
but also singing. Mr E. Tay1or, Gresham Professor of Music, lately
afforded a number of my professional and scientific friends a good
proof of this, as he composed an extemporary tune which she and other
two patients sang correctly, whist in the state of neuro-hypnotic
sleep. She could have done the same whilst awake, and hundreds have
witnessed her speak and sing, both when asleep and when awake.
It is curious, that in some who have a very incorrect musical ear,
so that they could not be taught to sing the most simple air correctly
when awake, can nevertheless be made to do so, when in this peculiar
sleep. This was remarkably exemplified in a young lady, whom I wished
to be taught a simple air which she might sing by way of
exemplification, at some lectures I was to give at a distance, but it
could not be accomplished; she could not follow in tune more than a
note or two together; but when asleep, she can sing any air correctly
which I have tried her with. Still, when awake, she cannot do so. For
an example of the same sort during natural somnambulism, see pages
296-298, and 309, of Dr Abercrombie's work on the Intellectual Powers.
Of one it is noted, "She often sung, both sacred and common
pieces, incomparably better, Dr Dyce affirms, than she could do in the
waking state." Of the other, "she was, when awake, a dull
awkward girl, very dull in receiving any kind of instruction, though
much care was bestowed upon her, and, in point of intellect, she was
much inferior to the other servants of the family. In particular, she
shewed no kind of turn for music, and she did not appear to have any
recollection of what passed during her sleep." During
somnambulism, she sang beautifully, and exhibited great intellectual
powers.
I shall conclude this department by recording the following case
from my note book. The inability of this patient to sing in tune
may have been partly owing to a defect in the organ of hearing, and
partly to a state of nervousness affecting the vocal organs. The
experiment was undertaken merely to gratify the particular desire of
the patient, as at that time I had had no similar case, and was not
prepared to say, whether it was likely or not to be successful.
However, I felt assured it would do him no harm, and made the trial
accordingly, and assuredly nothing could have proved more successful
or more gratifying than the result.
Case XI. 7th July, 1842, I was consulted by Alexander M'Roberts, 29
years of age, residing with Mr Hannay, of 42, Thomas Street,
Manchester. He said, he had never been able to join in tune, although
he had frequently attempted to do so. After being hypnotized for some
time, (about ten minutes,) I roused him, and desired him to walk into
the dining- room, and after hypnotizing him once more, a friend played
the organ, and I directed (or led) him to sing the scale, beginning
with D, as he could not sing C, owing to the natural pitch of his
voice. He very soon managed to sing the scale quite correctly, upwards
and then downwards. I now roused him, and made him sing it when awake,
which he did remarkably well. I now tried him with the first part of "Robin
Adair," which he followed in correct tune several times. This
took place in presence of Mr James Reynolds, Mr Daniels, Mr James
Braid, my nephew, and myself. In the evening of that day, after being
again hypnotized, he sung the first part of "Robin Adair"
very correctly several times, and also Pleyel's German Hymn, and the
old Hundred Psalm, quite correctly. Pleyel's German Hymn he never
heard before. This took place in presence of four gentlemen.
His inability to sing prior to these operations was borne testimony
to by several of his friends, one of whom had a good knowledge of
music, but despaired of ever seeing Mr Roberts able to sing, and he
was exceedingly surprised at the result. This patient was operated on
several times afterwards, and when I last saw him, could sing a
considerable number of tunes, and follow any simple air with ease and
correctness.
The next sense I shall refer to is that of smell. Having put the
patient into the hypnotic state, he ought to be kept in it a longer or
shorter time, according to the object had in view. If to excite or
quicken the sense, the limbs should be extended and a gentle current
of air should be passed against the nostrils occasionally; but if to
diminish the sense, this ought not to be done.
Case XII. is in interesting example of restoration of the sense of
smell by hypnotizing. A young lady was subjected to this operation for
a different complaint. On being aroused, and after I left the room,
she made inquiries as to the cause of the great noise she heard in the
house, and expressed her surprise at the noisy manner in which the
various duties of the apartment where she was were performed. They
assured her there was nothing going on in the room where she was,
different from what was usually the case, nor was there any thing to
account for the noise she complained of, and they therefore held her
complaints to be only imaginary. She persisted they were real. The
fact was, she had been for a length of time dull of hearing, and the
improvement of this sense consequent on the hypnotizing, had so
quickened the faculty as to account for the difference she
experienced. Moreover, she had for a considerable time previously lost
the sense of smell, and it was now ascertained that this sense had
also been restored, though the same operation. Another patient who
had lost the sense of smell for nine years, had it restored after
being twice hypnotized. For a beautiful illustration of the extent to
which this sense is aroused during the hypnotic sleep, see footnote,
extracted from a report of my conversazione to the Members of the
British Association, as recorded by the "Manchester Times."[Footbote:"A
beautifully contrived experiment was here put in practice by Mr
Clarke, and Mr Townend, to test the truth of the phenomena. Mr Braid
had drawn their attention to the wonderful exaltation of the sense of
smell. A rose had been held before the patient, the scent of which she
had followed about the platform in every direction with the most
excessive eagerness - now standing on tiptoe to reach it when held
aloft, anon bending herself forward with the most graceful ease, till
her face came almost in contact with the floor - now darting after it
across the platform (notwithstanding that her eyes were bandaged) with
unerring aim as to the direction in which it was moved - or throwing
herself into the most fantastic attitudes, but always with surprising
ease, to catch its fragrance when moved merely round her person in
tantalizing play. At length she no longer followed it, and Mr Braid
now explained that the sense of smell had entirely gone, and could
only be renewed by a current of air across the nostrils. Mr Clarke
here motioned Mr Townend to go across the platform, which he did very
softly, and Mr Clarke then threw the rose to him, a distance probably
of from four to five yards. Mr Clarke having thus taken the precaution
to guard against the suspicion of collusion or trick, himself passed a
current of air, across the nostrils of the patient, so as to again
exalt the sensibility of the organ. She now moved forward as though in
search of some object that had escaped her, and was advancing in front
of the stage, which was not exactly in the direction the rose was
thrown, when suddenly her limbs and entire body shook with a tremulous
motion, and she stooped slightly, and evinced the utmost terror. Mr
Braid explained that this was occasioned by the rattling of a
cartridge over the pavement under the window partly, and partly by a
feeling of insecurity, arising from the boards on which she stood
being limber and yielding considerably to the foot. When the noise of
the carriage had ceased, she turned her face about till it pointed in
the direction where Mr Townend stood, when, though he held the rose at
a distance of three yards from her, she evidently caught the scent,
and darted towards it with unerring precision, and appeared almost to
revel with delight in its fragrance. A sudden burst of applause from
the audience, quick as thought, dissipated the charm; and she stood
aghast, apparently in an agony of terror. Mr --- laughed, and
attempted to convey to a small circle around him the impression that
all this was feigned, but the attempt was disregarded. In the very
front of the company, and amongst those most narrowly watching the
experiments, were the Dean of Manchester, the Rev C. D. Wray, the Rev
A. W. Gibson, the Rev H. Ethelston, Colonel Wemyss, and a number of
others whom we might mention, including several surgeons, who were
capable of forming an opinion of their own, and we heard from several
of them expressions at once of surprise at the phenomena, and of
conviction that they were real. In fact, it was the conviction of
common sense, since it would have been far more wonderful as a piece
of trickery than as Mr Braid accounts for it. Every one must have felt
that it was impossible for any person in a natural state to follow a
flower about the stage blindfolded, (supposing the patient was awake,)
passed about as it was from hand to hand backwards and forwards, with
such ease, certainty, and rapidity; but taking Mr Braid's solution of
the difficulty, that the senses are unnaturally exalted, the mystery
is at an end. The only thing extraordinary that then remains is, that
such an agency should not before have been discovered."]
The next senses I shall refer to, are touch and resistance; under
which I shall adduce examples of the beneficial results of this
agency, in the cure of abnormal exaltation or depression of these
functions. There are few diseases more striking in their
manifestations, or more important in their character and tendency,
than those included in this class, namely, paralysis of sense or
motion, or both; or the reverse, exalted feeling, and tonic or clonic
spasm.
Tic doloureux is well known to be one of the most agonizing
affections to which the human frame is liable. It may arise from a
functional disorder of the nervous system, of a local or more general
character, or from an organic cause. The symptoms are much the same in
both varieties, but the chances of effecting a cure are very
different. In the former variety, a cure may be effected, and by no
means I know, so speedily and certainly as by hypnotism; but in the
latter, the chances of success are very different, either from this or
any other known remedy. I have repeatedly applied it in the one case,
without any apparent effect, either good or bad, but, in the other,
with the most immediate and striking advantage. I give a few cases in
illustration of this success in functional disorder.
Case III. W. M'Leod had been suffering for two months from a violent
attack of tic of the head and face, which had resisted the treatment
prescribed by his surgeon. He had been taking carbonate of iron in
ample quantity. After eleven minutes' hypnotism, he was aroused quite
free from pain, and it never returned in the same degree of violence,
and by a few repetitions of the same process, he was completely cured,
and has remained well for about a year. The general state of his
health required the aid of other means, but the violence of the tic
was overcome before he took a single dose of medicine from me.
Case XIV. A young lady was suffering from a most violent attack of
tic doloureux, so much so, that I heard her screams before entering
the house. The paroxysms came on so frequently that she was roused
before I could succeed in hypnotizing her at first trial. I now
administered thirty drops of laudanum, in a little water, sprinkled
some over the poultice on her face, and instantly commenced
hypnotizing her again. In five minutes she seemed to be in a
comfortable sleep, the features perfectly placid, the respiration
calm, not a muscle seemed to move during the time I remained in the
room, (which was a quarter of an hour,) whereas she had a violent
paroxysm every three minutes previously, contorting her whole body,
and when I examined her, after having been down stairs a considerable
time, she was lying in exactly the same posture as when I left her,
with the same appearance of placid sleep. When I called next morning I
was told she had slept for five hours and a half, and had had no
return of tic after awaking. As she was in the somnolent state, and
the paroxysms of pain suspended within five minutes, it is
quite clear this could not be due to the few drops of laudanum, as
they could not have been adequate to arrest such a violent complaint,
at all events, not in the course of five minutes. [Footnote:
The following is the statement of the above case, attested by Mr.
Mallard, druggist, who had been called to visit this patient before my
arrival, which I give because of some very unwarrantable interference
by other medical men, - " I was present with Miss G. when Mr.
Braid visited her, in consequence of a violent pain in the face,
coming on in severe paroxysms, as occur in tic doloureux. I had
applied poultices, and had other means in readiness, but owing to the
violence of the pain, Mr. Braid, the usual medical attendant of the
family, was sent for. Her screams were heard in my house, during the
paroxysms, and they recurred about every minute, and lasted nearly a
minute and a half, as nearly as I can recollect. Mr. B. had an
opportunity of hearing her on coming into the house; and shortly after
being in her bedroom she had a second attack. Mr. B. now tried to
hypnotize her in his usual way, but she was roused by the violence of
the pain. He now gave her a few drops in water, and sprinkled a few
over the poultice, and applied it to the cheek again, and immediately
repeated his operation, after which she seemed to be in a sound sleep,
and gave no farther indication of pain in less than five minutes. Mr.
Braid, as well as myself, remained a considerable time, at least three
quarters of an hour, and both left convinced she was comfortably
asleep, and next morning I heard she had passed a good night, having
slept about five and a half hours, and that the tic had not returned
since we left. Every word of this has been carefully read and
considered before being signed.
(Signed) A. T. MULLARD."
21st June, 1842. ]
Case XV. Miss --- had been suffering severely from tic for several
weeks, and had several teeth extracted without relief. During a
violent paroxysm, I succeeded in hypnotizing her, and when aroused, it
was quite gone, and has never returned. In the affection to which
these cases belong, there is frequently such irritability of the skin,
that a slight touch over the affected nerve is quite sufficient to
excite a paroxysm of pain. I shall now adduce some cases illustrative
of the opposite condition, when there was deficiency or entire
loss of feeling; and which have nevertheless been greatly benefited,
or entirely cured by hypnotism. 'The following case is illustrative of
its successful application where there was paralysis both of sense and
motion.
Case XVI Mrs Slater, 33 years of age, in the autumn of 1841, had
suffered a good deal during her pregnancy, and in December of that
year was delivered of a seven months' child. From this period, her
legs, which had been very weak for some time previously became very
much worse, and in a short time she lost all voluntary power over
them, together with loss of natural feeling. She had been under the
care of three professional gentlemen, but as she became worse instead
of better, notwithstanding the means used, the case had been
considered hopeless, and left to itself, for some time previous to my
being consulted, which was on the 22d April, 1842. I found she had not
only lost feeling and voluntary motion of her legs and feet, but that
the knees were rigidly flexed, the heels drawn up, the toes flexed,
and the feet incurvated, and fixed in the position of slight club foot
(varus.) She had not menstruated since her confinement, but there was
no other function as regarded the secretions or excretions, which
appeared to be at fault. Her speech was imperfect and her memory
impaired. I hypnotized her, and endeavoureds, whilst in that
condition, to regulate the morbid action of the muscles, and
malposition of the feet and legs. In five minutes I roused her, when
she thanked God she now felt she had feet, could feel the floor
with them, and could move her toes. I now raised her on her feet,
and with the assistance of her husband supporting her by the one arm,
and myself by the other, she went across the room and back again to
the sofa, moving her legs and supporting half the weight of her body
on them. I operated on her again the same evening, after which she was
able to support herself standing with the soles of her feet on the
floor. She required merely to be steadied by placing the points of the
fingers of one of my hands against her back. Before being operated
on, the heels were drawn up, and the feet twisted so that she could
only have touched the floor with a small portion of the outer edge of
the feet, near the root of the little toes. I hypnotized her in the
same manner daily for some time with increasing improvement, so that
in a week she was able to walk into her shop alone, merely requiring
to steady herself by the wall, and in two weeks more she could walk
into it without any assistance whatever. Two months front my
first seeing her, she went to Liverpool, and was able to walk several
miles in a day. She could walk from the middle of the town where she
lodged, to the pier head and back, and from her lodgings to Everton
and back, all in the same day, which was several miles partly on very
steep acclivities. She had no relapse, and has continued well ever
since.
In a very few days after I first operated on this patient, the
catamenial discharge appeared for the first time since her
confinement. She had no internal medicine, nor external application
whatever to her legs for several days after I first saw her. Her
extraordinary improvement, therefore, resulted entirely from the
effects of the operations. After I had attended her some days, she
required same simple aperient medicine, and I afterwards prescribed a
diuretic, which I hoped might expedite the cure. The feeling and power
of her legs and feet were greatly restored, her speech perfect, and
her memory much improved, before she had a single dose of medicine
from me. Her improvement therefore was strictly the result of
hypnotism only.
The extraordinary effects manifested in this case, as well as in
many others, after a few minutes' operation - so different from what
is realized in the application of ordinary means - may appear
startling to those unacquainted with the powers of hypnotism. On this
account, I have been advised to conceal the facts, as many may
consider it impossible, and reject the less startling,
although not more true reports of its beneficial action in
other cases. In recording cases, however, I consider it my duty to
report facts as I have found them, and to make no compromise
for the sake of accommodating them to the preconceived notions or
prejudices of any one.
Case XVII. Samuel Evans, 45 years of age, had suffered much from
pain in the spine, and also been afflicted with impaired feeling as
well as power of the superior extremities for four years. He suffered
also occasionally in the head, for which he had undergone every
variety of treatment usual in such cases, under many medical men,
myself included, but with so little success that he had not been able
to dress him- self for five years: he could not lift the left arm, and
natural feeling was almost entirely gone from it. The right arm was
also affected, but in a less degree, when he applied to me on the 25th
April, 1842. I hypnotized him and he was so fully satisfied with the
improvement he experienced, as to induce him to come to Manchester to
be operated on daily. In a very short time his improvement, both as
regarded strength and feeling, was most decided, as he could lift a
heavy chair with the worst arm and could feel a small object such as a
pin, which could not have been distinguished by him with that hand
when I first saw him. The pain in his back was also speedily much
relieved. He was exhibited at my conversazione to the British
Association, 29th June, 1842, in this improved state, and has made
still farther progress since, although not yet able to follow his
usual avocation. I should not omit to add, that this patient was under
my own care for some time in 1841, when, although he derived benefit
from the means used, he was not nearly so much or so rapidly relieved,
as by my present mode of treatment by hypnotism.
Case XVIII. Mr ---- 58 years of age, consulted me in consequence of
a paralytic affection of two and a-half years' standing. Stated by his
friends that he had had an apoplectic seizure two years and a-half
before, which was at first accompanied with total loss of
consciousness, and of sense and motion of the right side for six
weeks. He then gradually recovered, so as to be able to walk a little
in the course of four or five months. When he called on me 3d June,
1842, his gait was very feeble and insecure, always advancing the
right side foremost, his arm had always been supported in a sling, he
could raise it with an effort as high as the breast, had not the power
of opening the hand, the thumb was much and rigidly flexed. Had little
or no feeling in that hand. After being hypnotized for five minutes,
feeling was restored, he could open the hand and grasp much firmer,
and raise it to his forehead. His speech, which had been very
imperfect, was also much improved. This patient was operated on for
some time with partial improvement, so that he could manage his arm
without a sling, and the feeling continued improved, and there was
also slight improvement in his gait, but I was of opinion, that there
was organic mischief in the brain which would prevent a perfect
restoration, and therefore discontinued farther trials. Case XIX. Miss
Sarah Melior had been under my care for nine months, for an affection
of the lower part of the spine, accompanied with pain and weakness of
the lower limbs, and with contraction of the knees, so that she had
been unable to stand or walk without crutches during that period. I
had used every means usually adopted in such cases, but instead of
improving, she was getting worse in every respect, till I tried
hypnotism, the satisfactory results of which were too immediate and
apparent to admit of the slightest doubt of its great value on this
occasion. The following is a statement attested by the patient:- "
Had suffered severe pain in my ankles, with contraction of the knees,
and pain at the bottom of my back, so that I had been unable to walk
without a pair of crutches for nine months. During this period, I had
taken medicines internally, used liniments to the legs and spine, been
leeched and blistered over the lower part of the spine, but still,
instead of improving, I was getting worse, both as regarded the pain
and contraction, so that I was becoming quite deformed, from the legs
being bent on the thighs, and they on the body. I was thus about nine
or ten inches less in stature than formerly, and than I am now. About
the beginning of last March (1842) I came to Mr Braid, who had
prescribed the other means to me without benefit, when he said he
would try his new method with me. After being hypnotized three
times, I was able to walk front my lodgings to the house of a
friend who lived a few houses distant in the same street WITHOUT MY
CRUTCHES, and in two days after, from that house to Mr Braid's WITHOUT
CRUTCHES. I was operated on almost daily for three weeks, when I
returned home, and at that time I was able to walk half a mile
without crutches. After being at home five weeks, I returned to
Manchester, and have been attended by Mr Braid for two months, and
always found myself better after the operations. I look no medicine
during my first stay in Manchester; and on this occasion having only
done so when required for a violent cold on two occasions, from
imprudent exposure. Since I came to Manchester last, one day I walked
to Grosvenor Street, Piccadilly, and back again to my lodgings in
Lower Mostly Street, fully a mile and a half, without inconvenience;
on another occasion to Hulme and back again, fully two miles. I
was quite sensible, and could hear all that was said or done during
all the operations.
(Signed) SARAH ANN MELLOR.
JANE LIVESEY, Witness.
C. WILSON, Witness."
MANCHESTER, 12th July, 1842.
This patient was exhibited at my conversazione 19th June, 1842.
After returning home, she had the misfortune to get entangled by one
of the feet in a cart rut, in a lane, which threw her back, but having
returned and been hypnotized, I was enabled to send her home much
improved, and when she called on me lately, she continued so.
Case XX. Mrs. J. 29 years of age, requested my attendance, 17th
February, 1842. Had been attacked in the autumn of 1840, with slight
degree of weakness of left side, and difficulty of speech, neither of
which had ever been entirely removed. Three months after she was
delivered of a still-born child, and had been affected with
convulsions ten days prior to delivery, for which she seemed to have
been treated in the usual manner. In about a month after delivery,
3lst January, 1841, she had an apoplectic attack, attended with total
loss of consciousness, and paralysis of the left side, for which her
medical attendant had prescribed the usual treatment. I was called to
attend her on the 17th February, and continued to do so for five
weeks, when, as there was no particular improvement manifested, she
passed into other hands, and after being under treatment with them for
ten weeks, without improving, she was sent into the country, where she
remained for about thirteen months, when she was brought back to town
to be placed under my care, 15th June, 1842. The following was her
condition at this period. Her mouth very much drawn to the right side;
her speech very imperfect; and her mind confused. The left hand and
arm were quite powerless, and rigidly fixed to the side, the hand
clenched, the fingers and thumb being rigidly and permanently flexed.
The left leg very rigid, the heel drawn up, and the foot twisted so
that it could only approach the ground By resting on the outer edge
near the root of the little toe; she could move this leg a little, but
had never been able to stand, or walk a step, or support any weight on
it. I hypnotized her, though owing to her mind being so confused, I
experienced considerable difficulty in getting her to attend to the
necessary instructions for producing the condition. However, I at
length succeeded, and after the first operation - I kept her in the
hypnotic state for ten minutes - she could hold her mouth much
straighter, could move the fingers a little, and lift the hand and arm
four inches, and, with the assistance of her mother-in-law and myself
supporting her by the arms, she was able to support half the weight of
her body in walking across the room and back again. Her speech was
also improved, and she evinced less confusion of mind. Next day I
found the improvement was permanent, and hypnotized her again with
advantage. 17th, Found her improved, and still more so after being
again operated on. She could now, on merely steadying herself by
laying hold of her mother-in-law's shoulder, stand supporting herself
on the left leg, when the right foot was lifted clear from the floor.
Her speech was still more improved, and mind more collected, so that I
had very little difficulty in hypnotizing her now. She was operated on
daily, with advantage, till the end of that month, and the results
shewn to some of the most eminent professional and scientific
gentlemen in this town. During the next two months she was operated on
at times only, being so much better. In a few weeks she could walk to
the door, steadying herself against the wall, and in a few weeks was
able to walk into the street with the aid of a crutch. She had no
medicine during this attendance. I only saw her occasionally now, and
on the 1lth September, when I had not seen her for nine days before,
whilst taking her usual airing in the street, she was seized with
apoplexy, from which she died within sixteen hours. On inspection, the
whole of the superior and anterior lobes of the right side of the
brain were found to be in a state of atrophy; only a thin layer, and
that in a state of ramolissement, covering the ventricle, which was
filled with serum, as was also the space between the pia mater and
arachnoid, to make up the space vacated by the wasting of the cerebral
substance. There was no effusion of blood. It is not at all surprising
that such a case should have resisted former treatment, or proved
fatal at last; but it seems surprising that, with such a state of
brain, hypnotism should have had the power of producing so much
improvement is it did. [Yes indeed! - DM]
Case XXI. 14th Jane, 1842, Mr Thomas Morris, 42 years of age,
consulted me. He had had a paralytic stroke fifteen years previously,
which deprived him entirely of the use of the right leg, and rendered
the left weak and numb. In six weeks was able to walk a little, but
never recovered entirely, being always weak and lame. Fifteen months
ago had a second attack, with total loss of consciousness for a week,
and also complete loss of voluntary power of the whole body.
For several weeks required the urine to be drawn off by catheter. He
has lately had the urine passing involuntarily sometimes, at other
times voided with great difficulty. He has never regained the power of
his legs so as to enable him to stand or walk without assistance; and
has been, for the last six months, growing worse. The arms very weak,
being unable to raise the right higher than the head, and even that
accomplished with great difficulty. Speech also very imperfect, and
his ideas so confused that he could make himself nderstood with great
difficulty. Hypnotized him for five minutes, when he could speak much
better; could raise his arm and hold an umbrella perpendicularly, or
horizontally, with his body, with perfect ease, and could walk across
the room WITHOUT ASSISTANCE, for the first time since last
seizure.
(Signed) THOS. MORRIS..
Witnessed by JOHN SHIPLEY.
Duncan Street, Strangeways.
C. C. MORRIS.
JOHN W. PACEY.
JAMES BRAID, Junior.
15th, Had the pleasure of finding the improvement noted above was
permanent, and also, that he had been able to retain his urine and
void it at pleasure, whereas it had been passing involuntarily,
both by night and day, immediately before being hypnotized. He
was again hypnotized to-day with additional advantage. 17th, Found him
still better, having been able to walk in the street with one
stick for the first time for last five years.
Repeated the operation. 18th, Still better, so that, with the aid of
his two sticks, he had walked into Ducie Street by himself. Operation
repeated.
This patient went on improving, and on the 29th June was exhibited
at my conversazione. His speech was greatly better immediately after
first operation, and his ideas seemed more vivid and clear. He was
also able to sign his name, and which he did very well, for the first
time since his last seizure. Nor should I omit to add, that he had
regained power over the rectum, which he had not previously; and in
about ten days he had got sufficient power of his hands to enable him
to work. After he was considerably recovered he had the misfortune to
fall, and injured the lower part of the back very much, which impaired
the recently acquired power of the legs. They are somewhat better, but
not nearly so well as they were a few weeks after he had been under my
are. His arms, however, still retain their increased power, as I saw
him lately lift a bed-room chair with the right. arm, and hold it up
nearly at full arm's length; and the mind keeps pretty clear, much
more so than before being hypnotized, notwithstanding he has had a
severe attack of bowel complaint, from which he has been liable to
suffer occasionally.
It would be difficult to adduce a more striking proof than the
above, of the extraordinary power of hypnotism, there having been so
many points at fault, all of which were immediately meliorated, and
some of them permanently so.
Case XXI. Mr John W., 21 years of age, called to consult me, 18th
April, 1842, for a paralytic state of the left side of the face, of
thirteen days' standing. He had no power of the muscles of the left
side of the face, consequently the mouth was drawn to the right, and
he had no power of closing the left eyelid. In ten minutes after being
hypnotized, and friction used, he could open and close the eyelid with
facility, and had the power of retracting his mouth to the left of the
mesial plane.
Case XXIII. 11th July, was consulted by Samuel Edwards, who had been
unable to work for six weeks, in consequence of a paralytic state of
the extensor muscles of the wrist, and a semi-paralytic state of the
flexor and extensor muscles of the fingers. He had injured the arm by
a heavy lift, and by a blow about two years before. The paralytic
state came on suddenly about six weeks previously to my seeing him,
accompanied by a tingling or prickling feeling in the fingers. I
hypnotized him, calling into action the weak and entirely paralytic
muscles in the best way I could In consequence of this, he acquired
the power of flexing and extending the wrist, when the arm was held
horizontally with the ulna downwards, and of grasping pretty firmly
with the fingers, immediately after the first operation, which he
could not do before, as witnessed by several highly respectable
individuals who were present the whole time. On the evening of the
following day, he was able to milk a cow with this hand, and when he
called on me two days after, I found him greatly improved. I operated
on him again with additional advantage, and found him able to grasp so
firmly that he could hold a single finger fast enough to enable him to
be thus pulled from his eat without losing his hold.
He had undergone various treatment, including blistering, under two
surgeons before I saw him.
17th July, 1842, he called on me, and had still greater power of the
hand. After being again hypnotized, he could readily lift the one side
of a heavy library table with the hand, which was quite powerless when
I first saw him six days before. He stated, he had been able to work
with it constantly from the time I saw him, on the 14th.
31st, He called on me, stated he had been improving. Was hypnotized
once more.
August 7th, he called on me, and the first thing he did was to hold
out his arm at full length, and shew me he could bend and extend the
wrist, whilst the arm owns in the state of pronation. He had been able
to do so for same days. Had been able to milk five cows the
day previous, Hypnotized him again, after which he had still more
power. He has not required to call on me since, being nine months ago.
This patient must have continued well, as I have heard nothing more of
him, which I was to do if he had any relapse.
I could easily multiply cases of successful practice in the
treatment of paralysis by hypnotism, were it not for occupying too
much space, I shall, therefore, condense a few.
XXIV. A gentleman sixty years of age had a paralytic stroke two
years and a half before consulting me, which deprived him entirely of
the use of the right arm, and enfeebled the right side and leg. When
he called on me, he walked very feebly, could scarcely close the
fingers and thumb, and could not extend them fully. He could with
great difficulty raise the hand as high as the pit of the stomach, the
pupil of the right eye was considerably larger than the left, and not
quite circular; speech very imperfect. After being hypnotized for five
minutes, he was able to open and close the hand freely, and to raise
the hand above the head, and pass it to the back of the head, and he
could also walk and speak much better. Pulse regular, - before
operation, his pulse was very irregular. When he called on me next
morning, I found the improvement had been permanent. I hypnotized him
once more with advantage, and again on the two following days; seven
weeks afterwards he called on me, when I found the improvement was
permanent. He could speak and walk much better, could raise the arm,
and move the fingers and hand freely, could pass the hand above and
over the head, and take off his hat with it. The right pupil also was
quite circular now, and nearly the same size as the other.
Case XXV. 4th June, 1842, Mr J. H., 67 years of age, had a paralytic
strike, 19 months previously which deprived him entirely of speech,
and of motion of right leg and arm, when he called on me, his speech
was very imperfect, his hearing dull, and he had very little power in
closing the hand, could raise the hand to the mouth, said he could
sometimes raise it a little higher, but never so high as his head.
After being hypnotized for five minutes, he could speak and hear much
better, could grasp much stronger, and would raise the hand a foot
above the head, and put his coat on without assistance, passing it
over his head. His walking was also much firmer. He seemed greatly
pleased with being able to put his coat on, as it was the first time
since his seizure. He was also able to sign his name for the first
time, to attest the accuracy of my report of his case, which he did
before two witnesses who had been present during the operation. He
called on me twice after this, the last time two weeks from his first
visit, when I found the improvement was permanent.
Case XXVI. Thomas Johnstone, 36 years of age, had a paralytic
seizure 13th February, 1842, which deprived him of feeling and motion
of left arm and hand. Had partially recovered motion so as to be able
occasionally to move the fingers a little, and to raise the arm nearly
to the horizontal position, but frequently was suddenly struck with
pain and total loss of power of the arm, and hand, and fingers, for
four or five hours after. Had been struck in this way just before I
saw him, and he was quite powerless, as above described, or rather the
arm was spasmodically fixed to the side; had been under medical
treatment ever since his first seizure. 4th May, 1842, hypnotized him
for four minutes, after which he could move the fingers, hand, and arm
freely, elevating it above his head, across his body in either
direction, and could retain it in any situation he was asked. The
feeling, however, was still very imperfect, 5th May, called on me to
go to my lecture, when he had the complete control of the hand, arm,
and fingers. He was hypnotized in the lecture-room the same night, and
in four days after the feeling, is well as power, was restored to it.
26th, called on me again, and has perfect voluntary power of the arm,
as well as natural feeling and heat of the member. Attested as correct
by the patient.
(Signed by proxy to which the patient affixed his mark) THOMAS
JOHNSTONE.
Witnessed by JOHN HARDING.
I have also a copy of a certificate of his condition from the
physician who attended him immediately before he consulted me. On the
10th January, 1843, his father informed me that his son had requested
him to call on me, and say he was in America, and had remained well
ever since I saw him, and, that he wished his father to express how
grateful he felt for the benefit he had derived from my operations.
I shall only give one more case illustrative of this class.
Case XXVII. Mr H., 39 years of age, had been partially paralytic of
the inferior extremities for ten years, which time on some time after
a fall, accompanied with double vision. The latter disappeared under
treatment, but the former increased. when he called on me, 18th
February, 1843, he was walking with a crutch and stick, and with the
assistance of both and a servant, it was with great difficulty he
could ascend the few steps at my door. After the first operation, he
could walk across the room and back again, without either crutch
or stick, and after being operated on next day, he was able to
mount twenty-eight steps to his bedroom without his crutch, and has
done so ever since. In ten days, I was agreeably surprised to see him
on the fourth bench of the lecture-room of the Manchester Athenaeum,
to which he had ascended eighty-one steps, with the aid of a stick in
one hand.
This patient had not been aware, until I called his attention to the
fact, that he had very defective vision of the right eye, and was
surprised to find on testing this, that when the left eye was closed,
he could with difficulty see the large heading of the header of the
Medical Gazette, whereas he could read the ordinary sized print of
that article with the left. After being operated on, he could read the
small print of the leader with the right eye also, it which he felt
greatly surprised, as well as at the increased. power of his legs,
because, as he had been conscious all the time of the operation, he
could not believe I had done any thing to him, till he found on trial
he had been so much benefited in both functions.
Here, then, we have the beneficial results most unequivocally
ensuing even when the patient imagined no effect could have been
induced. The improvement in the sight has remained permanent, and he
also improved in the power of his limbs, till be had the misfortune to
fall, whilst carelessly looking it something when walking on the
street one day.
In confirmation of the efficacy of a few minutes of hypnotism, in
curing many cases of paralysis, I may refer to the reports of the
Liverpool papers, as to what took place at my lectures in that town in
April, 1842. There were hundreds who witnessed the effects when I
publicly operated on such patients, who were entire strangers to me.
Cases where the patients had been for years powerless of limbs, so
that they could not unlock the clenched hands, nor raise the arm to
the chin, even with the aid of the other arm, have been enabled in
eight or ten minutes, to open the hand, and lift the arm above the
head. My intelligent friend, Mr Gordon, lately informed me, he had
treated a paralytic case most successfully by hypnotism.
Case XXVII. Mrs. E., thirty-seven years of age, had a paralytic
affection when thirteen months old, which deprived her entirely of the
use of the right leg, which has never been recovered. At seven years
of age, she had a second attack, which deprived her also of the use of
the right arm, which was recovered after nine months' professional
attention to it.At fifteen years of age she had a third attack,
which drew her face, and deprived her of speech for some time, but was
recovered from; and she had no farther attack of the sort till 8th
January, 1842 (being twenty-two years from former attack.) The latter
attack enfeebled the right arm, and completely paralyzed the whole of
the left side. Being of full habit, she was bled from the arm, had
active cathartics, leeches, and blisters. In six days there was
improvement to this extent, that the right hand could be raised as
high as the shoulder, the left arm could be moved feebly, and the hand
closed feebly and slowly. When sitting on a chair, the left leg could
be moved with great difficulty, so as to raise the heel from the
ground. I hypnotized her, and in five or six minutes she could raise
her right hand and arm above her head, could move the left arm
freely, and grasp firmly, and could raise the left leg so as to place
the heel eighteen inches front the ground. Next day she was able to
walk across the floor with her one crutch. A pain in the knee induced
her to avoid walking afterwards, but in three weeks she could walk
quite cleverly is before last attack. The other cases were all in the
chronic state, of long standing, and had resisted all ordinary means,
and the restorative powers of nature and time, and yet we have seen
what extraordinary powers can be exerted, and effects produced, in
such cases by hypnotism. The latter proves its superior efficacy, to
other means, in more recent cases.
Case XXVIII. I shall conclude the subject of paralysis with the
following most interesting case. The subject of it was Miss Atkinson,
a middle-aged and very intelligent lady, and I shall give the case as
recorded by herself in a letter she was so obliging as to furnish me
with, for the purpose of publication in this work.
LETTER FROM Miss E. ATKINSON,
(of the Priory, Lincoln.)
"MOSLEY ARMS, MANCHESTER.
Monday, 4th July, 1842.
"Dear Sir, - I have very great pleasure in furnishing you with
a statement of my case, I beg you will make whatever use of it you
think proper, and most sincerely do I wish that it may lead others
suffering from disorders on the nerves, to seek relief from the same
source, and with the same success.
"In January, 1838, I was attacked with cold and influenza,
accompanied by a violent cough, on the 9th of this month. Ten or
twelve days after the first attack, without any previous warning, my
voice p 221
left me instantaneously, and I could not utter a sound louder than
the faintest whisper. For three weeks I had no medical advice, hoping
daily, from my ignorance of the nature of the complaint, that my voice
would return; but being disappointed, and feeling my health and
strength declining, consulted Mr. Howitt, an experienced and eminent
surgeon in Lincoln, who immediately requested I would confine myself
to my own lodging-room which was to be kept at a regular temperature.
He prescribed such medicines as my case required, and ordered blisters
to my throat and chest, which were kept open, until I became so
completely debilitated that it was considered necessary to discontinue
them. Towards the latter end of April my health was considerably
improved, and I was allowed to leave my room though my voice was still
merely a feeble whisper. Shortly afterwards, I paid a visit to a
sister in York, whose family surgeon, Mr. Caleb Williams, I man in
extensive practice, prescribed for me, and look great interest in my
case. Soon after my return to Lincoln, I consulted Mr.Joseph Swan,
6, Tavistock Square, London, who entirely approved of the treatment I
had undergone, and prescribed such additional remedies and medicines
as he thought would be beneficial. Since then he has continued to
visit me whenever he has been in the country. Galvanism has been tried
without producing any effect; electro-magnetism also, by a scientific
friend (not I medical man.) I have frequently conversed with several
other professional gentlemen, who have also taken a great interest in
my case. They all agree in opinion that the attack was paralysis of
the organs of voice, without disease; and that the treatment I have
undergone has been most judicious; in fact, that every thing has been
done for me the medical profession could suggest. Every one of them
has told me, that when my health and strength returned, there was
every reason to believe I should recover my voice. I remained in a
very weak and delicate state for some time, but have now been in
perfect health for more than twelve months, yet without having the
power of speaking above a whisper.
"I considered the recovery of my voice hopeless, until hearing
of the many cures you had performed y hypnotism, I was induced to
state my case to you, and request your opinion as to the probability
of this system benefiting one. Your reply was, 'If, as seems
to be the opinion of most of the professional gentlemen consulted,
your loss of voice is owing to exhaustion of the nervous
energy of the vocal nerves, and not to positive
destruction of any portion of them, I consider my mode of
operating is likely to be very speedily successful. On the other hand,
if there is positive destruction of the nervous substance, with
loss of continuity of the principal trunks of the nerves, it will
alter the chances very materially. However, as his cannot be
positively known without trial, and as the extraordinary power we
possess of rousing nervous energy may be sufficient to enable the
function to be restored with a state of nerve which could not be of
service under any other agency, I should decidedly give it is my
opinion that it ought to be tried, as no risk can attach to the trial,
and a week or two at most, will be all the time required for giving it
a fair trial.' This raised my hopes; I came to Manchester on Tuesday
the 28th of June. You operated on me twice that evening, and twice
each succeeding day, but without producing any change on my voice
until Saturday, July 2nd, when, on rousing me from the hypnotic state,
I spoke aloud without the slightest effort. My voice was then weak;
you have continued to operate on me until now, Monday morning, (4th
July,) and my voice is fully restored to its original strength, with
the power to vary its tone at will. Thus has hypnotism given me back
the power to make myself understood by those to whom I address myself,
of which I had been deprived for the last four and a half years. I
have not suffered the slightest pain or inconvenience while submitting
to the operations nor any unpleasant effects afterwards; neither did I
ever once lose consciousness of all that was passing around me.
"With heartfelt humble thanks to our heavenly Father for this
and every blessing, particularly for the hitherto unknown power
bestowed on man; and with deep gratitude to you for your kind
attentive care while so skilfully and successfully using this power
for the restoration of my voice, I beg you to believe me, dear sir,
yours very respectfully, and greatly obliged,
"ELIZABETH ATKINSON.
It is but justice to the professional gentlemen who and been
consulted in this case prior to application being made to me, to say,
that I consider they had treated the case most judiciously, according
to our previous experience in such cases; and it must be interesting
to them to find that in this agency our art has acquired a new and
efficient resource for such cases.
This case is interesting in many points of view. The circumstance of
the patient having been operated on twice each day successively, that
is, eight times, without any visible improvement for I had her
tested before and after each operation - and being able to
speak aloud, without effort, on being roused from the hypnotic
condition on the fifth day, is sufficient proof that the
improvement as not the effect of imagination, but of the
physical condition induced by carrying the operation farther. Any
effect to have been anticipated from mere mental emotion we should
have expected to have been greatest at first, and to have become less
and less as the party became familiar with such operations. Here,
however, it was quite the reverse. I found, on testing the patient on
the 2nd of July, immediately before being operated on, that no
improvement had been effected from the former operations, (she had
been operated on eight times,) and therefore resolved to carry it
farther that time; and the result was, as noted above, that on being
aroused she spoke aloud without effort. It is also important, as
corroborating the statement of many others who have been cured of
various obstinate complaints by hypnotism, that they could hear
quite distinctly, and retained consciousness the whole time, of
all that was going on around them. In some cases, however, it is
necessary to carry it to the ulterior stage, or that of insensibility.
On the 19th October, 1842, I had the pleasure of receiving a letter
from Miss E. Atkinson, from which I make the following extract, in
proof of the permanency of the cure. "You will be glad to
hear that I have retained my voice without any intermission, since I
left you. The only difference is, that it has become stronger; and my
health is in every respect perfectly good." I had also the
pleasure of hearing from a friend, a few days ago, that she still
continues well, and it is now nine months and a half since her voice
was restored.
I doubt not there may be some who, on reading the cases I have
recorded in this treatise, will be disposed to appeal to the
well-known fact, that various complaints have been suddenly cured by
mere mental emotion, hoping thus to throw discredit on the curative
powers of hypnotism. Whilst I grant the premises, I deny the justness
of the inference. That I may meet the subject fairly, I shall now
quote some of the most remarkable cases of the sort which have been
recorded. "Dr Gregory was accustomed to relate the case of a
naval officer, who had been for some time laid up in his cabin, and
entirely unable to move, from a violent attack of gout, when notice
was brought to him that the vessel was on fire; in a few minutes he
was on deck, and the most active man in the ship. Cases of a still
more astonishing kind are on record. A woman, mentioned by
Diemerbroeck, who had been many years paralytic, recovered the use of
her limbs when she was very much terrified during a thunder-storm, and
was making violent efforts to escape from a chamber in which she had
been left alone. A man, affected in the same manner, recovered as
suddenly when his house was on fire; and another, who had been all for
six years, recovered the use of his paralytic limbs during a violent
paroxysm of anger." Abercrombie on the Intellectual Powers,
pp. 398-9.
To these might have been added the influence of the sight of a tooth
key or forceps, or even the approach to the house of a dentist, in
curing toothache.
Now, what are the legitimate conclusions to be drawn from the
history of such cases? Is it not simply this, that such results are
possible, and that they can be effected by different means? Now as it
is apparent that analogous results can be induced by hypnotism, I
would ask is hypnotism not quite as convenient and desirable a remedy
as setting a ship on ire, raising a thunder-storm, converting the
patient's house into a bonfire, or exciting him into "a violent
paroxysm of anger?
Again, of those who talk so much about the power of imagination, I
would ask, what is it? How does imagination act to produce such
extraordinary and contradictory results? For example, the mental
emotions of joy and sorrow, love and hatred, fear and courage,
benevolence and anger, may all arise either from real,
or from imaginary causes only, and may seriously affect the
physical frame. In many instances these different and opposite
emotions have proved almost instantly fatal; in other instances
equally sanitive. How is this achieved? Are not the whole of the
emotions accompanied by remarkable physical changes, in respect to the
respiration and circulation as well as sensation? Are they not highly
excited in one class, and depressed in the other? And may not this act
as the proximate cause in effecting the permanently beneficial results
during hypnotism? As already explained, analogous physical results can
be produced by hypnotism; and it is no valid reason why we should not
profit by it in the treatment of disease, that we cannot positively
decide as to its modus operandi. It seems quite evident that
we have acquired, in hypnotism, a more ready and certain control over
the physical manifestations referred to, and which can be turned to
useful purposes, than by any mode of acting on the imagination only,
which has hitherto been devised.
Rheumatism is another affection, for the relief of which I have
found hypnotism a most valuable remedy. I have met with some cases of
rheumatism, however, which have resisted this, as they had every other
method tried; and others, where it afforded only temporary relief; but
I am warranted in saying, that I have, on the whole, seen far more
success, more rapid and decided relief, follow this mode of treatment,
than any other. It has been chiefly in chronic cases in which I have
tried it. In its application, I first induce the somnolent state, and
then call into action the different muscles which I consider directly
affected, or which, by being so called into action, are calculated to
change the capillary circulation and nervous sensibility of the part
implicated. The patient must be retained in such position a longer or
shorter time, according to circumstances. The following cases will
illustrate the effects of this mode of treatment:
Case XXIX. Joseph Barnet, near Hope Inn, Heaton Norris, Stockport,
62 years of age, called to consult me on the 10th December, 1841, for
a severe rheumatic affection of the back, hip, and leg, of thirteen
years' standing, which had been so severe, that he had not been able
to earn a day's wages during that period. He and been equally a
stranger to comfort by day, as to refreshing sleep by night. He came
to me leaning feebly over his stick, suffering anguish at every step,
or movement of his body. He was treated at the commencement of his
complaint by a surgeon; but feeling no relief, like many others
similarly afflicted, he had recourse to all sort of nostrums, and also
to hot salt water baths. I hypnotized him, placing him in such
attitudes as his particular case required, and in fifteen minutes
aroused him, when he was able to bend his body freely, and not only to
walk, but even to run. He called on me in a few days after, when he
stated he had slept comfortably, and been perfectly easy from the time
he left me till the night before. I hypnotized him again with
advantage, and a few more times sufficed to restore him entirely. This
patient was seen, and bore testimony to these facts, at two of my
lectures. After one of them, from being too late for the coach, he
walked home, a distance of six miles. This was by no means judicious,
but proves incontestably his great improvement.
I was not at that time so well aware, as I have been since, of the
great power of hypnotism in such cases, and therefore ordered him some
medicine after the first operations; but from observing that the
relief immediately followed the operation before taking medicine,
and that the pain returned in some degree the night before next
visit, and when, had there been benefit resulting from the
medicine, it ought to have been diminished after using it, and
that relief was again afforded during the hypnotism, I felt convinced
the medicine had no share in the improvement, and therefore
discontinued it, and trusted entirely to hypnotism. In the beginning
of January, 1842, when this patient called on me, he was so well, that
I told him farther operations would be nnecessary for the present, but
added, that should he have any relapse, if he called on me again, I
would hypnotize him, without charge, of which offer he promised to
avail himself.
At my lecture on the 17th December, 1841, several questions were put
which elicited the following answers:- "Do you mean to say you
were never so well as you are now?" "Yes; I never earned two
shillings during all that time. This last winter I was worse than
ever." "Did you walk, sir, before ever you left my surgery,
without taking any medicine?"-" I did, and ran too."
See Manchester Guardian, 1st January, 1842.
I heard nothing farther of this patient for about seven months, and
therefore, after the offer I had made him at last visit, had every
reason to conclude he had remained well. However, it appears he had a
relapse shortly after he left me, and his family, upon whose exertions
he depended, being out of work, he could not afford to pay the railway
charge for coming to see me again. His relapse having been laid hold
of, and construed into a charge against me is having falsely
represented his case, I was induced to call on the patient,
accompanied by two friends, when he furnished us with the following
document,-
"Joseph Barnet, Providence Street, Heaton Norris, had suffered
from a severe rheumatic affection prior to last December, when he
applied to Mr. Braid. He was first under the care of Mr. ---- Higher
Hillgate, who bled, blistered, and prescribed medicines for him; but
the complaint remained unabated. From this period, took various
medicines, and other means recommended to him by those who had been
similarly afflicted, and who considered he would be benefited by such
means as had relieved them, but received no relief. After that applied
to Mr. ---- of Manchester, from whom he considered he derived benefit.
for a fortnight but the pain returning, he went to Liverpool to the
water baths, where he remained as long as money lasted, but without
being relieved.
"From this time tried various means as recommended by different
parties. During time whole of this period, he had never been able to
earn a day's wages. When he applied to Mr. Braid in December last,
(1841,) had een suffering extreme pain in every movement of the body;
in short, he had walked nearly double, supported on a stick. He was
operated on by Mr Braid, and in a quarter of an hour he was roused,
and found himself able to walk and run. At first, Mr. Braid walked him
about by the hand, and afterwards made him run without any assistance
whatever, as his wife and others present can testify. The case is
stated by Mr Braid in his lectures in my (his) presence was perfectly
correct, as I (he) bore testimony to at the time. Owing to being
unable to pay the expenses of the railway, he did not return to Mr
Braid, when he had a recurrence of the pain. He had never informed Mr
Braid, that he had had a recurrence of the pain, and never saw him
afterwards until the evening of the 26th June, 1842,
(Signed) JOSEPH his+mark BARNET.
J. A. WALKER.
THOMAS BROWN.
HARAIT BROOKS."
(Daughter of J. BARNET.)
Case XXX. 11th January, 184). Mrs B, 48 years of age. Catamenia
ceased last spring. Has suffered from a severe rheumatic affection for
the last three months, and been confined for the last two months to
her bedroom. The legs, arms, neck, and head, were excessively painful,
so that the slightest movement was attended with great agony. She was
quite alarmed at my taking hold of her arm to feel the pulse. When in
bed could not turn over, nor bear the slightest touch. 11th January,
1842, hypnotized her, and roused her in ten minutes, when she was
quite free from pain, being able to walk, stoop, and move the arms,
wrists, and fingers, with perfect freedom. 12th, had slept comfortably
all night; had been able to lie on her side, which she could not do
before for three months; could rise from the chair, and move legs and
arms without pain. There was, however, a soreness or uneasy feeling,
although not amounting to pain, in some parts of the limbs. Hypnotized
her for eight minutes, when she felt less of the numbness, and
followed me down stairs, and ascended them again, without taking hold
of the banister, and taking the steps regularly and cleverly with both
feet alternately. 14th, Found her down stairs enjoying herself with
her father, husband, and friends, almost quite well. Hypnotized her
again, and also in a day or two after, and she had no recurrence of
the rheumatism, although a degree of stiffness of the limbs remained.
She had no medicine from me till the rheumatism was gone, when she had
some for a different complaint. This patient was seen at my house
seven months after by about sixty friends, including several
professional gentlemen, when the above statement was read in her
presence, and confirmed by her as correct to that time; and as I have
heard no intimation, I feel assured she has not had a relapse.
Case XXXI Mrs S. has been already referred to; case VI. She had
suffered much from rheumatism for many years, and had never been
entirely free of it, notwithstanding she had undergone much treatment.
After first operation she was much relieved, and after a few more was
entirely free from pain. It has recurred occasionally since, but has
always been removed by one or two more operations of the same sort,
and which are neither painful, nor in any way unpleasant.
Case XXXII. Another rheumatic case of a patient 53 years old, of
seven years' standing, where sleep had not only been courted by
exhausted nature, but also by the most powerful doses of narcotic
drugs; on one occasion 400 drops of laudanum had been taken in two
hours; still the pains continued, and yet, by fifteen minutes
of hypnotic sleep, procured by the simple agency I recommend, this
patient was relieved of his agonizing pains. In this case, from my
knowledge of the eminence of the professional gentleman who had
prescribed for him, I feel assured every known remedy had been
resorted to, but without effect, and yet this agency succeeded in a
few minutes. This patient had suffered severely for seven years; was
first hypnotized 10th February, 1842, and again on the 17th and 19th.
He seemed as nearly as possible entirely free from pain, and had
suffered very little after the first operation, less than at any
previous period during the seven years he had been a rheumatic
subject. I have lately heard he had a relapse some time after I last
saw him; but no reasonable person could expect three operations should
have sufficed to eradicate such an obstinate complaint permanently;
most probably a repetition of the process would.
Case XXXIII. Mr. John Thomas, 155, Deansgate, consulted me at the
end of April, 1842, for a severe rheumatic affection of the loins, and
right hip and leg, which had continued for two weeks. Had a rheumatic
fever two years before, which confined him to bed for sixteen days,
and to his room for a week longer; and he did not get rid of the pains
for three months after he was able to go out, although he tried Buxton
and Matlock baths, and also the medicated and sulphur baths in
Manchester. When he called on me, (April, 1842,) I hypnotized him, and
when roused he was almost entirely free from pain, and never required
a repetition of the operation. He had no medicine. On the 28th July,
he called on me to say he had continued quite well in every respect
from the time he was hypnotized, and attested the same, and the
correctness of the above statement, by appending his name to it in my
case-book, and he has also been seen by many professional and other
friends who can bear testimony to the same effect, he continued well
when I saw him lately.
Case XXXIV Master J. Lancashire, 12 years of age, was brought to me
in September, 1842, he was suffering from a violent rheumatic
affection of the legs, back, and chest, so that he required to be
carried into my house. After being hypnotized, he was so much relieved
is to be able to walk about the room freely, and to walk to his cab
without assistance. Next day he called, and was hypnotized again, and
left my house quite free from pain, and has kept so well as never to
require another operation. He had no medicine, either externally or
internally. His mother and he called some time after to inform me he
had remained quite well, when they both attested the correctness of
the above statement of his case.
Case XXXV Mrs. P., a lady upwards of 50 years of age, and suffered
so severely from rheumatism that she had not enjoyed a sound night's
sleep for seven months. External and internal means, which had been
beneficial in a former similar attack, had been tried without effect,
before I was sent for to visit her. She was suffering excruciating
pain in one leg, particularly about the knee joint. When I proposed to
relieve her by hypnotism she repudiated the idea, told me she had no
faith in it, and felt assured in her own mind such an operation could
be of no use to her. I told her I cared little for her want of faith
in the remedy, provided she would submit to be operated on as I should
direct. She at last consented, and in the presence of her three
daughters was hypnotized. In eight minutes she was aroused, and was
quite free from pain; wished to know what I had done to her; said she
felt assured hypnotizing her could not have relieved her. To this I
replied by asking where her pain was felt now. She answered she felt
no pain, but persisted she was sure I had done nothing to take it
away. The manner in which she could walk and move her limbs was
sufficient proof the pain was gone, notwithstanding her scepticism
about the agency. When I called next day, I was informed by her family
she had slept comfortably all night, and had gone out, being
quite well. Two days after I called again, and was informed by her
that she had been overtaken in a shower, and had over-exerted herself
on that occasion, and had had a return of the pain, although not so
bad as at first, I hypnotized her again with complete relief, and she
has never required a repetition of the operation since, so that she
his now enjoyed a release from her old enemy for eleven months, in
defiance of her scepticism. Here, then, we have a very decided proof
that it was not imagination; in short, that it was a physical and not
a mental change which effected the cure.
Case XXXVI. Mr. Hampson, another rheumatic case, I was called to
16th May, 1842. The patient was a powerful young man, 23 years of age;
had suffered severely for three weeks, the last two been entirely
confined to bed, unable to move his legs, or to feed himself; for two
weeks had not known what it was to have ten minutes continuous sleep,
from the violence of the pain, and spasmodic twitching of the limbs
rousing him, his left hand, fingers, and wrist were so swollen and
painful, that he was quite alarmed at my attempting to feel his pulse.
After being hypnotized for five minutes whilst in the recumbent
posture, I had his arms extended, and he was now roused and able to
move the wrist and fingers with comparative ease. I now hypnotized him
once more, and operated on his legs. In six minutes he was
able to get on his feet, walk round the bed and back again and get
into bed and lie down without assistance. Next morning I found
him up and dressed, and able to walk very comfortably. He had slept
well through the night. I hypnotized him again. Next night he slept
uninterruptedly, and in the morning felt nothing of his pains
excepting in the left shoulder; but this was quite well by the next
day. He had no medicine except a mild aperient.
The cases adduced I consider sufficient to prove this to be a
valuable agency in the treatment of chronic rheumatism. I
shall now adduce the results of its application in two cases of acute
rheumatism.
Case XXVII. Mr. G., a literary gentleman, consulted he last winter.
I found him complaining of severe pain in the right arm and hand; one
point, the size of a crown piece, on the outer edge of the arm, a
little below the elbow joint, was exquisitely painful. He was
enveloped in double clothing, but, notwithstanding, was quite starved
and chilly with cutis anserina, pulse 120 strokes a minute. I told him
I considered it was the commencement of an attack of rheumatic fever,
and I should wish to try whether it could be cut short by hypnotizing
him. He had never been operated on in this way before, but readily
assented. In six minutes I had him bathed in perspiration, and his
pain greatly relieved. He was now ordered to bed, to take a mixture
with vinum colchici. Next morning I found him much freer from pain, it
had never been severe since the operation the day before, the skin
comfortable, and his pulse only 80. To remain in bed and continue his
medicine. Next day the pulse was 70, and no complaint of pain, and the
following day; he was able to go out and attend to his business. No
relapse.
Case XXXVIII. Mrs B., the mother of a numerous family, had a severe
attack of rheumatic fever, affecting different joints in succession,
and also violent pain in her head. I proposed she should be brought
out of bed and hypnotized. The pain of her knees, feet, and ankles,
was so severe that she could not stretch her legs, nor attempt to
support herself, in the least degree, upon them. She had therefore to
be carried from the bed to the chair where she was to be hypnotized.
In five minutes she was roused, the headache gone, and the pain in her
legs and feet so much relieved that she was able to walk to bed,
requiring only to be slightly supported by the arm. The pains never
returned with the same degree of severity. She was hypnotized a few
times more, and always with benefit. Of course I prescribed such
medicines as I considered necessary to improve the state of the
secretions, so is to put as speedy a termination to the attack as
possible, but there could be no doubt that hypnotism contributed very
much to meliorate her suffering, and also in bringing the attack to a
more speedy termination, than would have been the case had I trusted
to the effects of medicine only.
The following cases can perhaps scarcely be introduced in any other
place with more propriety than the present. They are cases of painful
affection of the members, arising from irregular action of the
muscles, consequent on mechanical injury.
Case XXXIX. Mr. J. J. consulted me on the 6th November, 1842. He
stated he had a fall from a horse five months previously, when he
sustained severe in jury of the left hip and thigh. He was confined to
bed for two weeks, under medical treatment, supposing the parts to be
only bruised and sprained. He then began to move about with crutches,
but with great pain; and a consultation being held, it was considered
there was dislocation of the hip joint, but the attempts made to
reduce it failed. At the end of nine weeks from the accident, another
surgeon, 40 miles off, was sent for, who confirmed the opinion that
there was dislocation of the hip joint, and he succeeded in reducing
it. The patient was now confined to bed for two weeks, and, on rising,
was able to move about with the aid of a stick, but without crutches.
However, be was still very lame, and in much pain. When he called on
me, which was on the 6th November, 1842, he was not suffering much
pain, but was extremely lame. The knee was a little advanced forwards,
and the toes considerably everted. In attempting to walk without the
aid and support of his stick, the body was thrown so much to the left
at every step, as if the leg were considerably shorter, that with
other circumstances coupled with this, led me to suspect fracture of
the neck of the femur within the capsular ligament. A minute
examination satisfied me this was not the case; and I now considered
the affection was one of irregular action of the whole muscles of the
hip and thigh, some being trophied and semi-paralyzed, and others
inordinately tense. With this view I believed I should be able to
rectify the irregular distribution of nervous and muscular energy by
hypnotism, an opinion the correctness of which was quickly verified.
Having hypnotizes the patient, and placed the leg in that position
calculated to restore the functions according to the view I had taken,
in about six minutes he was roused, and was agreeably surprised with
such a remarkable improvement. Next morning he was again operated on,
and was then almost entirely free front lameness, and entirely free
from pain, so that he asked my opinion whether I considered it at all
necessary for him to take his stick in going through the town on some
business. He called on me the three following days, after which he
went home, equally gratified as myself with the result of our
operations. He had no internal medicine, nor external application,
whilst under my care. He attested the accuracy of the above report
before leaving; and, as I have not heard from him since, have reason
to believe he continues well.
This patient was seen by several gentlemen, some of them members of
the profession, who can bear testimony to the correctness of these
statements, as they had an opportunity of hearing the whole from the
patient himself.
Case XL. Mr J. H., 68 years of age, called to consult me on the 8th
November, 1842, relative to a painful state of his left shoulder, the
consequence of a blow he had sustained two months previously. He had
been under the care of two eminent professional gentlemen from the
time he received the injury till within a few days before I saw him.
There was a wasting of the muscles about the shoulder, great pain in
moving the arm, and it was so weak that he had not been able even to
button his coat with it. After being hypnotized the first time he
could use it, raising it above his head, and moving it in any
direction with ease and freedom. After being operated on next day he
had still more power. The following day he felt a little pain behind
the shoulder, under the scapula, which was entirely removed by being
once more hypnotized, and calling the affected muscles into action. On
Saturday, the 11th November, 1842, he left me, quite well, to return
home to attend to his business. Both this patient and his son attested
the correctness of the above report in my case book.
Case XLI. J. W., 15 years of age, had a severe injury of the hip,
which was followed by suppuration between the trochanter and ischium,
where there was a fistulous opening; the leg was flexed and perfectly
useless, being supported by a sling passed over his shoulders, whilst
he supported himself very feebly on two crutches, his health having
suffered greatly during his affliction. He stated that he had just
left a public institution, where he was given to understand no hopes
were entertained of his recovery. I hypnotized him, and during that
condition regulated the malposition of the limb, stretching the
contracted muscles, and strengthening others, by exciting into action
those which had been weakened by being overstretched and enfeebled by
inaction. The result as, that on being aroused he could straighten his
leg, and walked (using his crutches of course) with the sole of his
foot resting on the floor. He was operated on daily with the most
marked improvement both as regarded his leg and his general health. In
three weeks he could walk with one crutch, in two weeks more threw
that aside, and walked with a stick, and shortly after could walk
without that aid, and is now well, excepting a little weakness of the
ankle joint. He had no internal medicine from me, and no external
application, excepting one BookNeurypnology.html of ointment, the discharge having
entirely ceased within a week of his being under my care.
I shall now advert to the remarkable power of this agency in
speedily overcoming nervous headache. I have so many examples of this,
sometimes two or three fresh cases in a-day, that it is almost useless
to instance individual cases. However, I shall give a few.
Case XLII. Mrs. B., the mother of a family, has been constantly
annoyed with headache and maziness, for the last two or three years,
varying in intensity at different times, but never entirely free from
it. Consulted me, 22d January, 1842, for the above complaints, and
also stated that she was subject to attacks of epilepsy. I hypnotized
her, and in five or six minutes aroused her, when she was quite free
from headache. She was hypnotized almost daily for some time, and
remained quite free from headache, five weeks after she was first
operated on, and had much less of the mazy feeling, and no fit for two
months. She appeared so much better as to be taken notice of by all
her friends.
Case XLIII. Miss B., daughter of the above, was brought to me on the
23d January, 1843, in consequence of the improvement her mother had
experienced from the operation. She had suffered severely from
headache for six months, so much so, as frequently to cause her cry
and shed tears, and was never entirely free from it for that period. I
hypnotized her, and in five or six minutes roused her quite free from
headache or any other ache. She was operated on almost daily for some
time, and has had no return of the headache to this time, - four
months,- and has had her appetite much improved, and looks very much
better. She had no medicine.
Case XLIV. Miss S., on the 25th January, 1843, was suffering from a
most violent headache, and had been so all day. She could scarcely
open her eyes or see when they were open, and seemed quite prostrated.
I hypnotized her, and in five minutes she was aroused quite well, and
has had no return of it at the end of ten days.
Case XLV. Miss A., 20 years of age, had suffered severely from
headache from childhood, and never knew what it was to be entirely
free from that complaint, but frequently had it so severely as to
incapacitate her for any exertion, and almost to deprive her of sight.
She also had constant uneasiness at stomach, sometimes amounting to
severe pain, and when the attacks of headache were at the worst, the
pain at stomach was also much aggravated, and a severe attack of
vomiting generally terminated the violence f these paroxysms. In
April, 1842, I hypnotized her, and from that period she has been
almost entirely free from both headache and stomach complaint. At the
end of fifty-four weeks, I had the pleasure of hearing from herself,
as I had previously from her mother, that she scarcely had suffered
from headache at all since the operation, and never severely, or even
in the slightest degree for one hour at a time.
Case XLVI. Mrs T. had been suffering from severe pain of the head
for more than two weeks, without intermission either by night or day
when aggravated by a cough. For the last two days, the pain of the
side had been most distressing. The pulse was rapid, the cough
frequent and severe, and the pain in the side so acute as to prevent
free expansion of the chest as in ordinary respiration. I found there
was considerable spinal tenderness on pressing betwixt the shoulder
blades. I hypnotized her, and in five minutes, when aroused, she was
quite free from headache, the pain in the side so much relieved, that
she could move her body freely, and take a moderate breath with very
little inconvenience. Next day I found she had no return of the
headache, and very little of the pain in the side. She was again
hypnotized with advantage, which I repeated daily, and in six days the
pain of the side was quite gone, the pain of the head had never
returned, the cough was gone, the spinal tenderness which disappeared
at first operation had never returned after the first operation, and
the patient was now quite convalescent. She had no medicine but some
pectoral mixture to moderate the cough.
I shall how refer to spinal irritation, which is well known to be
the source of much suffering, not merely in the course of the spinal
column, but also, from its influence on the origins of sentient
nerves, on distant parts of the body. I have already referred to this
in cases 16 and 19, where there was loss of feeling and motion in one
case, and pain of the legs with contraction in the other. Where the
affection does not depend on active inflammation, I hesitate not to
say, that the pain of the spine, and other painful affections
dependant on the state of the spinal nerves which arise therefrom, may
be relieved more speedily, and certainly, and effectively, by
hypnotism, than by any means I have either tried, read, or heard of. I
shall give an example or two.
Case XLVII. Miss C. had suffered for years from spinal irritation
and headache, the pain extending round the chest, so that deep
breathing or free motion of the chest could not be tolerated. I tried
every variety of treatment, but in vain, and at last despaired of
benefiting her, and, from the extreme difficulty of breathing,
suspected it must end in pulmonary consumption. I now tried hypnotism,
which immediately succeeded in relieving the whole catalogue of
painful symptoms, and she was speedily restored to perfect health, and
has continued so ever since.
Case XLVIII. Miss --- had suffered much from spinal irritation for
years, and had undergone much severe treatment. Had been restored to
health and strength under my treatment, but was again threatened with
a relapse. I hypnotized her, and when roused, the spinal tenderness
was gone. A few more operations made a most marked improvement, and
she continued well for some months. She had a recurrence of the
complaint, when hypnotism was again had recourse to, with immediate
and decided advantage. I could easily multiply cases of this sort,
were it not for swelling the volume unnecessarily. I shall therefore
pass on to cases of irregular or spasmodic action of the muscles. I
have found it decidedly useful in several cases of chorea; and also in
cases of nervous stammer. In epilepsy it also frequently proves highly
useful, but there are some varieties of this complaint over which it
has no control. These I presume are such cases is depend on organic
causes, and which are found to resist every known remedy. It is
however well known that many cases which were supposed to have been of
this class have worn themselves out, or time and the efforts of nature
have effected some organic change. Whether hypnotism if persevered in,
might have a tendency to expedite the favourable result in such cases,
I am not prepared to say, but think it highly probable it might do so.
I feel quite confident, however, that in cases which are amenable to
treatment, this will be found one of the most speedy and certain
remedies. Of all the complaints for which mesmerism has been lauded as
beneficial, there are none so conspicuous as epilepsy, as has already
been referred to in the introduction. As the effects of hypnotism are
so nearly allied to mesmerism it would be superfluous for me to detail
a number of cases, I shall therefore give only a few.
Case XLIX. A girl who had been liable to six or eight fits in 24
hours, had only one the day after she was first hypnotized, none for
next five days, and was shortly quite well.
Case L, John Barker, aged 19 years, applied to me in August, 1842
for epileptic fits. He had first been seized with them when four or
five years of age, at first every week or fortnight, but as he got
older, became more frequent, so that, for some months previous to
applying to me, he had had as many as three fits a-week - had been
under treatment at a
public institution for two months before calling on me, and had a
great variety of treatment, but derived no benefit, and was then told
by the attendant, that he must never expect to get rid of them. He was
subjected to my usual hypnotic operation for such cases, was operated
on ten times altogether, and has had but one fit since he was operated
on; and that was the day after first operation. He had no medicine
from he excepting three aperient powders. He has now been free of the
fits for upwards of nine months.
Case LI. Mrs B., the mother of a family, had been subject to
epilepsy for seven years, and notwithstanding every variety of
treatment, allopathetic and homoepathetic, she had an attack at least
once a month. From the time she was hypnotized she had no fit for four
months, and has had none since.
Case LII. Miss B, had been subject to fits for nearly two years,
latterly had as many as five and six a-day; consulted me the end of
December, 1842; was hypnotized seven times, and had no return of the
fits for four months, when she had one, and in two weeks after a
second.
Hypnotism may be applied with great success in the treatment of
various distortions, arising from weakness of certain muscles, or
inordinate power or contraction of their antagonists; and I feel
convinced, that by this means, we may rectify many of those cases
which have hitherto been treated by section of the tendons or muscles.
The success which I have already had, by this means, of treating
lateral curvature m the spine, warrants me to speak very confidently
on the subject, in most cases. I feel convinced, there are very
few recent cases which may not be speedily cured by hypnotism, without
either pain or inconvenience to the patient. Patience and
perseverance will of course be necessary where the disease has been of
long standing, and though in such cases the cure may not be perfect,
the patient may be greatly improved by hypnotism.
The method of treating such cases is, first to induce the sleep, and
then to call such muscles into action as are calculated to bring the
body into the most natural position. By bringing these muscles into
play during this condition they acquire increased power, and
ultimately are permanently strengthened. As one side of the chest is
enlarged, and the other collapsed, I endeavour to restrain the
enlarged side, by applying compression to it during the sleep, whilst
the patient is directed to take deep inspirations, so as to expand the
opposite side. I also endeavour to make the patient stand in a
position the very reverse of that which I consider to have been
the chief cause of the curvature. As already remarked, I feel
convinced this method will prove very speedily successful, more
decidedly so than any other mode of treatment I know of, and especially
in such cases as are accompanied with spinal irritation.
Case LIII. The following is a case of its remarkable success with a
young lady, 14 years of age, who had had the advice of some of the
most eminent members of the profession in the provinces, and also in
Dublin and London. She was first observed to become malformed when
four years old, when brought to me on the 12th September, 1842, her
chin rested on her breast, and there was no power of raising it, from
the weakness of the recti muscles of the back, and contraction of the
sterno-cleido-mastoid muscles. The dorsal part of the spine and
shoulders were thrown backwards, the lumber vertebrae and pelvis were
thrown forwards, so that the deformity was very great, and the vigour
of the mind, as well as of the body, was greatly impaired. She had no
medicine nor external application, but was hypnotized night and
morning, and treated in the manner referred to, and the result was,
that in six weeks she could hold herself so much better, that when the
outline was taken, it was found that her spine was three inches nearer
the perpendicular than when I first saw her. During this period, no
mechanical means had been used, nor throughout any part of the time
she was under my care were any resorted to, with the exception of a
support for the chin, by way of remembrancer, till the habit of
attention was acquired of supporting the head by mere muscular effort,
which she now had the full power of doing. Nor should I omit to add,
there was also a great improvement in the mental faculties.
Neuralgic pain in the heart and palpitation, I have also found to be
relieved, or entirely cured, by neuro-hypnotism, more certainly and
speedily, than by ;an other means. The following are example: -
Case LIV. Miss Tomlinson, l6 years of age, I have already referred
to. She had suffered severely from painful affection of the heart,
with palpitation, which had resisted all treatment, and she had been
prescribed for by eminent professional men, both physicians and
surgeons, After being twice hypnotized, the affection of the heart
disappeared, and has never returned but once, when it was immediately
removed by hypnotism. It is now seventeen months since she was first
operated on, and she is in perfect health.
Case LV. Miss Stowe, 22 years of age. I have already referred to her
as one of the cases in which sight was remarkably improved by
hypnotism. She had also suffered most severely from palpitation of the
heart, accompanied with difficulty of breathing and dropsy, and
various other symptoms which led the medical attendants, one of them
an eminent physician, to pronounce the case hopeless, considering
there was serious organic disease of the heart. After being twice
hypnotized, all symptoms of affection of the heart disappeared,
(sufficient proof it had been only functional derangement,) and she
was speedily in the enjoyment of perfect health, and has been so now
for the last twelve months, and that from hypnotism only. This patient
had leucorrhoeal discharge, which had resisted every remedy for years,
and was so offensive as to cause suspicion she had malignant uterine
disease. It was completely gone in a week, after being first
hypnotized. She had no medicine excepting a simple aperient pill
occasionally. I should add, her hearing, as well as sight, was very
much improved by it.
Case LVI. Mr ---- had suffered severely from pain in the heart and
palpitation. He was hypnotized with decided relief, and a second
operation completely restored him, and he has kept well for the last
eight months.
Case LVII. Miss ---- had suffered much from palpitation of the
heart, so that she could not ascend in easy stair without bringing on
the most violent palpitation. I tested this before operating on her.
After being operated on, caused her ascend the same flight of steps,
which produced no palpitation, and she has never required the
operation to be repeated.
Case LVIII. A young man had suffered much from valvular disease of
the heart and palpitation and difficulty of breathing for four years,
the consequence of a rheumatic fever. He could not walk more than
twenty or thirty paces without being forced to stand or sit down.
After being hypnotized for a short time he could manage to walk
upwards of a mile at a stretch. In this case there was so much organic
disease as precluded the hope of a perfect cure, but no means could
have achieved for him what hypnotism did, and in such a short time
too.
When considering the power of hypnotism in blunting morbid feeling,
I may advert to its power of relieving, or entirely preventing, the
pain incident to patients undergoing surgical operations. I am quite
satisfied that hypnotism is capable of throwing a patient into that
state in which he shall be entirely unconscious of the pain of a
surgical operation, or of greatly moderating it, according to the time
allowed and mode of management resorted too Thus, I have myself
extracted teeth from six patients under this influence without pain,
and to some others with so little pain, that they did not know a tooth
had been extracted; and a professional friend, Mr. Gardom, has
operated in my way lately, and extracted a very firm tooth without the
patient evincing any symptom of feeling pain during the operation; and
when roused, was quite unconscious of such an operation having been
performed. He has extracted a second for this patient, and one for
another, without their being conscious of the operation. To insure
this, however, I consider that, in the majority of instances, it is
quite necessary the patient should not, when he sits down, know or
imagine the operation is to be performed at that time,
otherwise the distraction of the mind, from this cause, may render it
impossible for him to become hypnotized deeply enough to render him
altogether insensible to pain. The following case will
illustrate this view.
Case LIX. Mr. Walker called on me, stating he had been suffering
from a violent toothache; said he was anxious to have the tooth
extracted, but that he suffered so much pain from the operation, on
former occasions, that he could not make up his mind to submit to it,
unless when hypnotized. He had been frequently hypnotized, and was
highly susceptible of the influence. I told him I should be most happy
to try, but that unless he could restrain his mind from dwelling on
the operation, I might not be able to succeed in extracting the
tooth, entirely without pain. He sat down, and speedily became
hypnotized, But I could not produce rigidity of the extremities, nor
insensibility to pinching, which in general were so readily
induced in him. I therefore roused him, and told him the fact. He
stated he went on as usual to a certain point, but then began
to think, "now he will be putting the instrument in my mouth,"
after which the hypnotic effects went no farther. The pain was gone,
and he left. In the evening he again called on me, when I tried him
once more with the same results. I now aroused him, told him it could
not be done with him reduced to a state of total insensibility,
and that I should therefore extract it now that he was awake. I now
extracted the tooth. He was conscious of my laying hold of it, but had
felt so little pain that he could not believe the tooth had been
extracted. Nor would he believe it till he had the tooth put into his
hand. I now requested him to be hypnotized once more, when he became
highly rigid and insensible, in a shorter time than I had ever
seen him before. From this, and other cases, I infer, that if it
is intended to perform a surgical operation entirely without pain,
whilst in the hypnotic condition, the patient's consent should be
obtained or it to be done sometime, but he ought on no account
to know when it is to be done, otherwise, in most cases, it
would foil the attempt.
However, that patients may be operated on with greatly less
pain even when in the first degree of hypnotism, and whilst
expecting in operation, is quite certain, from the result of the case
of Mrs ---, related below which I now refer to as Case LX. I have also
performed other operations under similar circumstances, and with
similar results, namely, with greatly diminished pain,
although not entirety without pain.
Case LX. A lady had abscess connected with disease of the orbitar
process of the frontal bone, had the matter discharged by small
puncture, the wound closed by first intention and again opened, as
required, by the lancet. She experienced so much pain on each occasion
as to induce me to hypnotize her, after which she made no complaint,
although I durst not carry it far owing to the state of the brain. On
one occasion I was anxious to ascertain how she would feel by
operating without hypnotizing, when the result was so
distressing, as to induce me always in future to hypnotize her, before
such operations, and then all went on well.
Case LXI. An adult with worst variety of Talipes varus, of both
feet, had the first operated on in the usual way, and the other whilst
in the primary state of hypnotism. The present case and future
advantage, in respect to the latter operation, was most remarkable. I
have operated on upwards of three hundred club feet now, and am
warranted in saying I never had so satisfactory a result as in the one
now referred to.
In cases of dyspepsia it is of the greatest service. Most patients
feel the appetite greatly increased by being hypnotized, and that the
digestion is more vigorous than before being operated on. All
complaints, therefore, immediately connected with, or dependent on,
indigestion, may be expected to be benefited by hypnotism. It is well
known, many cutaneous diseases are of this class; and the following
will illustrate the remarkable power exercised by hypnotism on this
symptom, as well as several others associated with it:-
Case LXI. Mrs O., 33 years of age, the mother of a family, had been
very nervous for fifteen years, with tremor of the arms, was easily
alarmed, much disturbed by distressing dreams, and required being
aroused several times every night from severe attacks of nightmare.
She had also suffered severely from an inveterate eczema of the chest
and mamma, and integuments of the abdomen, which, for five months, had
resisted every remedy, both external and internal, under highly
respectable medical men. The fingers of one hand were also affected
with impetigo. She consulted me 31st August, 1842, when she was
hypnotized, and was aroused greatly relieved from the distressing
feelings of the head, and general nervousness. Her husband assured me,
that on walking out with her same evening, had he not seen her, he
could not have believed it was his wife who had hold of his arm, so
much was the tremor of her arm improved, and she slept soundly all
night without being troubled either by dreams or nightmare. She was
hypnotized daily, and in a few days she was quite well, both as
regarded her general health, and the obstinate skin disease; and as
she had no medicine nor external application, there could be no
disputing that it resulted entirely from the influence of hypnotism.
She has been well nearly ten months.
Case LXII. J. C., aged 40, and been severely afflicted for eighteen
months with impetigo sparsa, extending from a little below the knee to
near the toes. He had also severe pain in the ankle joint, so that he
had been disabled for work for eighteen months. I hypnotized him, when
he could walk better after first operation, without his stick, than he
could do immediately before with it. In a few days the improvement was
very remarkable, and within a week the disease of the skin was nearly
well, and very little pain in the joint. He was hypnotized almost
daily till the end of the month, had no medicine, and no dressing but
a little spermaceti ointment to prevent the cloth surrounding his leg
from adhering to the sore; and the skin disease being now quite well,
and very little pain in the ankle joint, in a few days after he was
enabled to resume his work. He had undergone much treatment, under
both public and private practitioners, but was becoming worse instead
of better. The immediate improvement in the appearance of the
cutaneous disease, as well as feelings of the patients in the two last
cases, were too obvious to admit of a doubt as to the remarkable
powers of hypnotism.
The next cases I shall refer to, are those of permanent contraction
or tonic spasm. The following are interesting examples of this form of
disorder, and the success of hypnotism in the treatment of them.
Case LXIV Mr J. O. 21 years of age, called on me 1st October, 1842,
complaining of a pain in the left temple, a continual noise in the
left ear, with occasional shoots of pain, and the hearing of that ear
very imperfect. He complained also of inability to open the mouth so
as to enable him to take his food comfortably, and that mastication
caused great pain, so that he frequently felt compelled to decline
taking his meals. Complaints had been coming on since previous Easter,
and were becoming worse, notwithstanding he had been under the care of
two medical men up to the day before he called on me. That day, 10th
October, 1842, he could not eat breakfast but, with great difficulty,
and had been compelled to take rice and milk for dinner for two days,
as he could eat nothing solid. I found he could not permit the mouth
to be opened more than half an inch without great pain and difficulty,
and besides the dulness of hearing already referred to, I found he
had also very imperfect sight of the left eye, which I tested very
accurately. He had not been aware of this until I called his attention
to it. I hypnotized him for about eight minutes, during which I was
enabled to open the mouth till the front teeth were nearly two inches
asunder, and he experienced no inconvenience from me doing so. On
being aroused, all the pain in the temple was gone; he could himself
separate the teeth one inch and three quarters, as accurately
measured, in presence of four very intelligent gentlemen who had been
present during the operation; and he could move the jaws with the most
perfect freedom and without pain. The hearing was also much better,
and the sight of the left eye also most remarkably improved. 2Nd
October, called on him again, when he stated he had been enabled to
eat a good supper after he left me the night before, and to take his
breakfast and dinner with perfect comfort to himself; that his hearing
was much better; and the sight of both eyes as nearly as possible
equal. He had had no pain in the temple since he was operated on,
unless when the mouth was opened to the utmost extent, and even then t
was trifling. He could now open the mouth to nearly one inch and three
quarters, before being operated on to-day, and after the operation, to
the extent of two inches, that is, the front teeth were two inches
apart.
This patient called on me a few days after to be operated on a third
time, and retained the improvement noted above. He was to call again
if he had any relapse, bit as he has not done so, I conclude he
continues quite well, and it is how nearly seven months since I last
saw him.
I shall now refer to other cases of spasmodic affection, which are
most interesting, as they afford us strong grounds to hope that
Tetanus, Hydrophobia, and other analogous affections, may be arrested
and cured by this agency.
Case LXV. A girl was seized with violent tonic spasm of the right
hand and arm, and side of the face. A respectable surgeon was
consulted, who ordered a blister to the nape of the neck, medicine,
fomentation, and liniments to the parts affected. The symptoms became
more urgent, and they sent for the surgeon again, but as he was out,
and as they were much alarmed, I was consulted. The blister had been
applied, but the medicines had not been used as directed. I found the
hand so firmly clenched that it was impossible to open it, the arm so
rigid it could not be moved; but, knowing the efficacy of my new
remedy, I hypnotized her, and in two minutes, with the most perfect
ease, I unlocked the hand, and removed the other spasmodic
contractions, and she was instantly quite well, and has continued so
ever since, now more than a year.
I shall only record one additional case, and a more remarkable or
satisfactory one I think could scarcely be adduced. I give the case as
correctly recorded by the patient's father, in a letter he sent for my
approval, previous to having it sent to be recorded in some
periodical. I preferred having its publication postponed, and now give
it precisely in his own words.
Case LXVI. Miss Collins of Newark. "My daughter, 16 years of
age, had been afflicted for six months with a rigid contraction of the
muscles on the left side of the neck, to so great a degree, that it
would have been impossible to insert an ordinary card between the ear
and shoulder, so close was their contact; and consequently she was
rapidly becoming malformed. She had had the best advice to be procured
in the country, and I had taken her to London with a written statement
of the treatment previously employed, and had the opinion of Sir
Benjamin Brodie, who approved of what had been done, but gave no hope
of speedy relief.
"In consequence of seeing a report of a lecture given on the
subject by Mr. Braid, surgeon, St Peter's Square, Manchester, and a
letter written to that gentleman by Mr Mayo of London, I went with
her, by the advice of Dr Chawner, who indeed accompanied us, and
placed her under the care of Mr. Braid on Thursday evening, the 24th
March last, (1842.) In less than a minute after hat gentleman began to
fix her attention, she was in a mesmeric (neuro-hypnotic) slumber, and
in another minute was partially cataleptic. Mr. Braid then, without
awaking her, and consequently without giving her any pain, placed her
head upright, which I firmly believe could not, by any possibility,
have been done five minutes before, without disruption of the muscles,
or the infliction of some serious injury, and I am thankful to say, it
not only continues straight, but she has the perfect control over the
muscles of the neck. A nervous motion of the head, to which she had
been subject after her return from Manchester, has entirely ceased,
and she is at present in excellent health. It is necessary to remark,
that at Dr Chawner's recommendation she was frequently watched while
asleep, but not the slightest relaxation was observed in the
contracted muscles.
" Many respectable persons can bear testimony to the statements
herein made.
(Signed) JAMES COLLINS."
" NEWARK, 11th May, 1842."
I have been informed that some very absurd reports have been
circulated, even in the metropolis, as to my mode of operating on this
patient, namely, that I had exhibited a vast display of gesticulations
and hocus pocus, in order to work upon her imagination. SUCH
STATEMENTS ARE UTTERLY UNTRUE, I simply desired her to maintain a
steady gaze at my lancet case, held above her eyes in the manner
pointed out at page 27 of this work, and after the eyes had been
closed, and the limbs extended for about two minutes, I placed my left
hand on the right side of her neck, and my right hand on the left side
of her head, and, by gentle means, gave a new direction to the
sensorial and muscular power, and was thus enabled by art,
rather than mechanical force, in less than half a minute, to incline
the head from the left to the right of the mesial plane. The muscular
contraction being thus excited on the right side of the neck; in
muscles which had been inactive for six months previously, was the
surest and most natural mode of withdrawing the power from their
antagonists, and reducing the spasm of the contracted muscles on the
left side. After allowing the patient to remain two minutes supporting
her head, now inclined towards the right, by her own muscular efforts,
to give them power on the principle already explained, I aroused her
in my usual way, by a clap of my hands. The patient's father, and Dr
Chawner of Newark, were present the whole time, and to them I appeal
as to the correctness of this statement, and in refutation of the
vile, unfounded calumny above referred to.
After the lapse of a year Mr. Collins was so kind as write, to
inform me his daughter continued in perfect health, with complete
control over the muscles of the neck. I could easily adduce many more
interesting cases, but trust those already recorded may be sufficient
to prove that hypnotism is an important addition to our curative
means, and a power well worthy the attentive consideration of every
enlightened and unprejudiced medical man.
top
|
Contents
Contents
Introduction
Chap1
Chap2
Chap3
Chap4
Chap5
Chap6
Chap7
Part II
|